Quattro™ DC
Quattro™ DC Elevator Drive
Technical Manual
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain for easy reference, inspection,
and maintenance. Ensure that the end user receives this manual.
TM7337 rev 16
© Magnetek Elevator 2016
WARRANTY
Standard products manufactured by the Company are warranted to be free from
defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of
shipment, and any products which are defective in workmanship or material will be
repaired or replaced, at the Company’s option, at no charge to the Buyer. Final
determination as to whether a product is actually defective rests with the Company.
The obligation of the Company hereunder shall be limited solely to repair or replace,
at the Company’s discretion, products that fall within the foregoing limitations, and
shall be conditioned upon receipt by the Company of written notice of any alleged
defects or deficiency promptly after discovery and within the warranty period, and in
the case of components or units purchased by the Company, the obligation of the
Company shall not exceed the settlement that the Company is able to obtain from the
supplier thereof. No products shall be returned to the Company without its prior
consent. Products which the company consents to have returned shall be shipped
prepaid f.o.b. the Company factory. The Company cannot assume responsibility or
accept invoices for unauthorized repairs to its components, even though defective.
The life of the products the Company depends, to a large extent, upon type of usage
thereof and THE COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY AS TO FITNESS OF ITS
PRODUCTS FOR THE SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS BY THE BUYER NOR AS TO
PERIOD OF SERVICE UNLESS THE COMPANY SPECIFICALLY AGREES
OTHERWISE IN WRITING AFTER PROPOSED USAGE HAS BEEN MADE KNOWN
TO IT.
This warranty does not apply to experimental products for which no warranty is made
or given and Buyer waives any claim thereto.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT LIMITED TO, ANY
WARRANTY OF MECHANTIBILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND BUYER HEREBY WAIVES ANY AND ALL CLAIMS THEREFORE.
LIMITATIONS IN NO EVENT SHALL MAGNETEK BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF PROFIT,
OF LIABILITY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES WHETHER
ARISING OUT OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT OR TORT.
QUATTRO is a trademark of Magnetek, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or
mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without written permission
of the publisher.
 2016 Magnetek, Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 11 Drive Ratings and Specifications ....................................................................................................... 11 Software Operating Features ............................................................................................................. 11 Drive Model Numbers ........................................................................................................................ 12 Quattro startup guide ............................................................................................. 13 Initial Inspection ................................................................................................................................. 13 Grounding considerations .................................................................................................................. 13 Initial adjustments after power up ...................................................................................................... 14 Interconnections ..................................................................................................... 16 Drive Sequencing .................................................................................................... 23 NORMAL operating sequence ........................................................................................................... 23 ABNORMAL operating sequence ...................................................................................................... 24 Quattro Pre-Charge ........................................................................................................................... 24 Drive Operation and Feature Overview ................................................................. 25 Analog Velocity Follower ................................................................................................................... 25 Preset Speed & Profile Generator ..................................................................................................... 25 Serial Link Follower............................................................................................................................ 25 Pre-Torque ......................................................................................................................................... 25 Torque Feed Forward ........................................................................................................................ 25 Torque/Current Ramp-Down ............................................................................................................. 25 Motor Field Current Control and Field weakening ............................................................................. 26 DSPR ................................................................................................................................................. 26 Over-Speed Test................................................................................................................................ 26 Fault & Alarm Reset ........................................................................................................................... 26 Electronic Motor Over-Load ............................................................................................................... 26 Armature Voltage Feedback .............................................................................................................. 26 Status Indicator Lights ....................................................................................................................... 27 MONITOR / Adjust / Set-up Parameters:........................................................................................... 27 Parameters .............................................................................................................. 28 Parameter Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 28 Menu Navigation ................................................................................................................................ 29 Parameter Tree .................................................................................................................................. 31 Adjust A0 menu ....................................................................................................... 33 Drive A1 submenu ............................................................................................................................. 33 S-Curves A2 submenu ....................................................................................................................... 43 Multistep Ref A3 submenu ................................................................................................................. 45 Motor Side Power Convert A4 submenu ........................................................................................... 47 Line Side Power Converter A5 submenu........................................................................................... 49 Motor Parameters A6 submenu ......................................................................................................... 51 Configure C0 menu ................................................................................................. 56 User Switches C1 submenu .............................................................................................................. 56 Logic Inputs C2 submenu .................................................................................................................. 68 Logic Outputs C3 submenu ............................................................................................................... 70 Analog Outputs C4 submenu ............................................................................................................. 72 1
Display D0 menu ..................................................................................................... 73 Elevator Data D1 submenu ................................................................................................................ 73 MS Power Data D2 submenu ............................................................................................................ 76 LS Power Data D3 submenu ............................................................................................................. 77 Utility U0 menu ........................................................................................................ 78 Fault F0 menu .......................................................................................................... 84 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 86 Maintenance Overview ...................................................................................................................... 86 Drive Servicing ................................................................................................................................... 86 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................... 87 Appendix ................................................................................................................ 111 Auto Tune Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 111 Inertia Calculations .......................................................................................................................... 113 Anti-Rollback .................................................................................................................................... 114 EMC Compliance ............................................................................................................................. 117 Encoder Cable Clamps .................................................................................................................... 117 Testpoints (Main Control Board – Power Supplies) ......................................................................... 118 Testpoints (Product Interface Board – Power Supplies).................................................................. 119 Testpoints (Product Interface Board – Other) .................................................................................. 120 Testpoints (Product Interface Board - LED definitions) ................................................................... 121 Testpoints (Power Distribution Board – Power Supplies) ................................................................ 122 Testpoints (Gate Drive Board – LED definitions) ............................................................................. 123 Testpoints (Customer Interface Board – Power Supplies) .............................................................. 125 Testpoints (Customer Interface Board – Other) .............................................................................. 126 Control Power Consumption ............................................................................................................ 127 Watts Loss ....................................................................................................................................... 127 Input / Output Ratings ...................................................................................................................... 127 Wire Terminal Specs........................................................................................................................ 128 Note: Additional ground terminal lugs are located at the top of the drive on right side of the chassis.
These lugs will accommodate ground wires in the range of #6-350MCM (10-175mm^2) .............. 128 Dimensions / Weights Standard ...................................................................................................... 130 Dimensions / Weights with Top Hat ................................................................................................. 131 Component Locations ...................................................................................................................... 138 Low Voltage Field Module ............................................................................................................... 143 Input Voltage Requirements ............................................................................................................ 145 Spare Parts Quattro DC Drive ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined. Index ....................................................................................................................... 158 2
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
Units
Range
menu
A1
Drive A1 Submenu – See Drive A1 submenu on page 33.
A1
CONTRACT CAR SPD
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
CONTRACT MTR SPD
RESPONSE
INERTIA
INNER LOOP XOVER
CURRENT LIMIT
GAIN REDUCE MULT
GAIN CHNG LEVEL
TACH FILTER BW
TACH RATE GAIN
SPD PHASE MARGIN
RAMPED STOP TIME
CONTACT FLT TIME
BRAKE PICK TIME
BRAKE HOLD TIME
OVERSPEED LEVEL
OVERSPEED TIME
OVERSPEED MULT
ENCODER PULSES
ENC RATIO MULT
SPD DEV LO LEVEL
SPD DEV TIME
SPD DEV HI LEVEL
SPD COMMAND BIAS
SPD COMMAND MULT
EXT TORQUE BIAS
EXT TORQUE MULT
PRE TORQUE TIME
ZERO SPEED LEVEL
ZERO SPEED TIME
UP/DWN THRESHOLD
ANA 1 OUT OFFSET
ANA 2 OUT OFFSET
ANA 1 OUT GAIN
ANA 2 OUT GAIN
FLT RESET DELAY
FLT RESETS/HOUR
UP TO SPD. LEVEL
RUN DELAY TIMER
AB ZERO SPD LEV
AB OFF DELAY
CONTACTOR DO DLY
TRQ LIM MSG DLY
ARB MODE
ARB BANDWIDTH
ARB DAMPING
ARB SPEED
THRESHOLD
NOTCH FILTER FRQ
NOTCH FILT DEPTH
A1
A1
A1
Site
Setting
Default
fpm
m/s
RPM
rad/sec
sec
rad/sec
%
%
% of rated spd
rad/sec
none
degrees
sec
sec
sec
sec
% of contract spd
sec
%
PPR
none
% of contract spd
sec
% of contract spd
volts
none
volts
none
sec
% of contract spd
sec
% of contract spd
%
%
none
none
sec
faults
% of contract spd
sec
%
sec
sec
sec
none
RAD
none
0.0 – 1500.0
0.000 – 8.000
30.0 – 3000.0
1.0 – 20.0
0.25 – 10.00
0.1 – 20.0
0.0 – 275.0
10 – 100
0.0 – 100.0
1 – 100
0.0 – 30.0
45 – 90
0.00 – 2.50
0.10 – 5.00
0.00 – 5.00
0.00 – 5.00
90.0 – 150.0
0.00 – 9.99
100.0 – 150.0
600 – 20000
0.001 – 32.000
0.1 – 20.0
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 99.9
-6.00 – +6.00
0.90 – 5.00
-6.00 – +6.00
-10.00 – +10.00
0.00 –10.00
0.00 – 99.99
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 9.99
-99.9 – +99.9
-99.9 – +99.9
0.0 – 10.0
0.0 – 10.0
0 – 120
0 – 10
0.00 – 110.00
0.00 – 0.99
0.00 – 2.00
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 5.00
0.00 – 10.00
0-2
1.00 – 15.00
0.01 – 20.00
100.0
2.000
50.0
5.0
2.00
2.0
250.0
100
100.0
100
0.0
80
0.20
0.50
1.00
0.50
115.0
0.10
125.0
5000
1.000
10.0
0.50
10.0
0.00
1.00
0.00
1.00
0.00
1.00
0.10
1.00
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
5
3
90.00
0.00
1.00
0.00
0.00
0.50
0
6.00
2.00
none
0.00 – 10.00
0.00
Hz
%
5 – 60
0 – 100
20
0
3
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
menu
A1
A1
A1
STNDBY FLD TIME
DSPR TIME
FULL FIELD FLT TIME
A1
SER2 INSP SPD
A1
SER2 RS CRP SPD
A1
A1
SER2 RES CRP TIME
SER2 FLT TOL
A2
Units
Range
sec
min
min
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
Sec
Sec
Default
0 – 999
0 – 546
0 – 99
0 – 100
0 – 0.500
0 – 300
0 – 1.540
0 – 200.0
0 – 2.00
5
10
1
30
0.150
10
0.050
180
0.5
S-Curves A2 Submenu – See S-Curves A2 submenu on page 43.
A2
ACCEL RATE 0
A2
DECEL RATE 0
A2
ACCEL JERK IN 0
A2
ACCEL JERK OUT 0
A2
DECEL JERK IN 0
A2
DECEL JERK OUT 0
A2
ACCEL RATE 1
A2
DECEL RATE 1
A2
ACCEL JERK IN 1
A2
ACCEL JERK OUT 1
A2
DECEL JERK IN 1
A2
DECEL JERK OUT 1
A2
ACCEL RATE 2
A2
DECEL RATE 2
A2
ACCEL JERK IN 2
A2
ACCEL JERK OUT 2
A2
DECEL JERK IN 2
A2
DECEL JERK OUT 2
A2
ACCEL RATE 3
A2
DECEL RATE 3
A2
ACCEL JERK IN 3
A2
ACCEL JERK OUT 3
A2
DECEL JERK IN 3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
4
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
7.99
2.000
7.99
2.000
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
7.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
3.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
3.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
0.0 – 29.9
8.0
Site
Setting
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
menu
A2
A3
DECEL JERK OUT 3
Units
Range
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
Default
2.40
8.0
2.40
Multistep Ref A3 Submenu – See Multistep Ref A3 submenu on page 45.
A3
SPEED COMMAND 1
A3
SPEED COMMAND 2
A3
SPEED COMMAND 3
A3
SPEED COMMAND 4
A3
SPEED COMMAND 5
A3
SPEED COMMAND 6
A3
SPEED COMMAND 7
A3
SPEED COMMAND 8
A3
SPEED COMMAND 9
A3
SPEED COMMAND 10
A3
SPEED COMMAND 11
A3
SPEED COMMAND 12
A3
SPEED COMMAND 13
A3
SPEED COMMAND 14
A3
SPEED COMMAND 15
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
ft/min
-3000.0 – +3000.0
0.0
m/sec
-16.000 – +16.000
0.000
5
Site
Setting
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Site
Sub
Parameter
Units
Range
Default
Setting
menu
A4
Motor Side Power Convert A4 Submenu – See Motor Side Power Convert on page 47.
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
ARM INDUCTANCE
ARM RESISTANCE
MOTOR FIELD RES
MOTOR FIELD TC
AUTO TUNE MOTOR
mH
ohm
ohm
sec
none
0.01 – 327.67
0.0001 – 2.9999
0.0 – 3276.7
0.000 – 32.767
Start Autotune?
 manual
 use saved par
 use self-tune
 100 – 2000
1 – 40
5 – 110
2.5 – 16.0
80 – 99
50 – 99
3 – 40
A4
GAIN SELECTION
none
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
GAIN BANDWIDTH A
GAIN BANDWIDTH F
SPD MODEFILT BW
PWM FREQUENCY
UV ALARM LEVEL
UV FAULT LEVEL
FLD CARRIER FRQ
A5
Line Side Power converter A5 Submenu – See Line Side Power Converter on page 49.
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
A5
Id REG PROP GAIN
Id REG INTGRL GAIN
Iq REG PROP GAIN
Iq REG INTGRL GAIN
DC BUS REG P GAIN
DC BUS REG I GAIN
INPUT L-L VOLTS
INITIAL L FREQ
DC BUS V BOOST
SW BUS OV LEVEL
none
none
none
none
none
none
volts
Hz
volts
volts
A5
BUS VREF SOURCE
none
A5
A5
A5
A5
PLL FILTER FC
POLE FILTER
PRE CHGE THRESH
LS PWM FREQUENCY
Hz
kHz
none
kHz
rad/sec
rad/sec
rad/sec
kHz
%
%
kHz
0 – 9.99
0 – 999
0.00 – 9.99
0 – 999
0.00 – 9.99
0 – 999
150 – 552
50 – 60
15 – 75
100 – 850
 track line v
trk vin param
 20.0 – 150.0
0.1 – 3.0
1 – 60
8.0 – 12.0
6
15.00
0.5000
9.0
0.607
MANUAL
500
5
100
6.0
90
80
3
0.30
10
0.30
40
3.00
40
200
55
30
850
TRACK LINE V
40.0
2.2
28
10.0
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
Units
Range
Default
menu
A6 Motor A6 Submenu – See Motor Parameters A6 submenu on page 51.
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
MOTOR ID
RATED MOTOR CURR
ARMATURE VOLTAGE
FULL FLD CURRENT
WEAK FLD CURRENT
STANDBY FIELD
FLUX CONFIRM LEV
ARMATURE IR DROP
TACH VOLT SENSE
TACH SPEED SENSE
OVLD START LEVEL
OVLD TIME OUT
SAVE MEAS ARM L
SAVE IR DROP
SAVE MEAS ARM R
SAVE FIELD RES
SAVE FIELD TC
None
amps
volts
amps
amps
amps
%
%
%
%
%
sec
mH
%
ohm
ohm
sec
C1
User Switches C1 Submenu – See User Switches C1 submenu on page 56.
C1
SPD COMMAND SRC
none
C1
RUN COMMAND SRC
none
C1
FIELD ENA SOURCE
none
C1
HI/LO GAIN SRC
none
C1
SPEED REG TYPE
none
C1
MOTOR ROTATION
none
C1
ENCODER CONNECT
none
C1
SPD REF RELEASE
none
C1
CONT CONFIRM SRC
none
C1
TACH FILTER
none
C1
PreTorque SOURCE
none
C1
PreTorque LATCH
none
C1
PTorq LATCH CLCK
none
C1
OVERSPD TEST SRC
none
1.0 – 400.0
55 – 600
1.0 – 40.0
1.0 – 40.0
0.0 – 40.0
25.0 – 99.0
0.0 – 25.0
0.1 – 60.0
0.1 – 40.0
100 – 150
5.0 – 120.0
0.00 – 327.67
0.0 – 3276.7
0.0000 – 3.2767
0.0 – 3276.7
0.000 – 32.767
























7









serial
multi-step
ser mult step
analog input
external tb
serial
serial+extrn
external tb
serial
enable on run
2-bit serial
internal
external tb
serial
elev spd reg
pi speed reg
external reg
cemf reg
forward
reverse
forward
reverse
reg release
brake picked
external tb
Off
On
none
analog input
serial
latched
not latched
external tb
serial


external tb
serial
Site
Setting
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
85.0
0.0
25.0
5.0
110
60.0
0.00
0.0
0.0000
0.00
0.000
MULTI-STEP
EXTERNAL TB
ENABLE ON RUN
INTERNAL
ELEV SPD REG
FORWARD
FORWARD
REG RELEASE
EXTERNAL TB
OFF
NONE
NOT LATCHED
EXTERNAL TB
EXTERNAL TB
fixed
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
menu
Units
Range
C1
User switches C1 Submenu continued …
C1
FAULT RESET SRC
none
C1
BRAKE PICK SRC
none
C1
BRAKE PICK CNFM
none
C1
BRAKE HOLD SRC
none
C1
RAMPED STOP SEL
none
C1
RAMP DOWN EN SRC
none
C1
BRK PICK FLT ENA
none
C1
BRK HOLD FLT ENA
none
C1
EXT TORQ CMD SRC
none
C1
DIR CONFIRM
none
C1
S-CURVE ABORT
none
C1
PRIORITY MESSAGE
none
C1
STOPPING MODE
none
C1
AUTO STOP
none
C1
DSPR ENABLE
none
C1
ARB SELECT
none
C1
SERIAL MODE
none
C1
SER2 FLT MODE
none












































8
external tb
serial
automatic
internal
serial
none
external tb
internal time
on speed cmd
internal
serial
none
ramp on stop
external tb
run logic
serial
disable
enable
disable
enable
none
serial
analog input
disabled
enabled
disabled
enabled
disable
enable
immediate
ramp to stop
enable
disable
disable
enable
disable
enable
none
mode 1
mode 2
mode 2 Test
immediate
run remove
rescue
Default
EXTERNAL TB
INTERNAL
NONE
INTERNAL
NONE
EXTERNAL TB
DISABLE
DISABLE
NONE
DISABLED
DISABLED
ENABLE
IMMEDIATE
DISABLE
DISABLE
DISABLE
NONE
IMMEDIATE
Site
Setting
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Sub
Parameter
Units
Range
Default
menu
C2 Logic Inputs C2 Submenu – See Logic Inputs C2 submenu on page 68.
C2
none
N.C. INPUTS
Hex Number
0X01
 pre-trq latch
 contact cfirm
CONTACT CFIRM
 run
 ctr pwr sense
LOGIC INPUT 2 TB1(2)  drive enable
CTR PWR SENSE
 run down

run
up
LOGIC INPUT 3 TB1(3)  extrn fault 1
 s-curve sel 0
 extrn fault 2
LOGIC INPUT 4 TB1(4)
 s-curve sel 1
 extrn fault 3
 ser2 insp ena
LOGIC INPUT 5 TB1(5)  extrn /flt 4
 step ref b0
 fault reset
LOGIC INPUT 6 TB1(6)
 step ref b1
 field enable
 step ref b2
LOGIC INPUT 7 TB1(7)  low gain sel
 mech brk hold  step ref b3
LOGIC INPUT 8 TB1(8)
 trq ramp down
 mech brk pick
 up/dwn

no
function
LOGIC INPUT 9 TB1(9)
 ospd test src
Logic Outputs C3 Submenu – See Logic Outputs C3 submenu on page 70
LOGIC INPUT 1 TB1(1)
C2
LOGIC OUTPUT 1
TB1(25
LOGIC OUTPUT 2
TB1(26)
LOGIC OUTPUT 3
TB1(27)
LOGIC OUTPUT 4
TB1(28)
C3
LOGIC OUTPUT 5
TB1(29)
LOGIC OUTPUT 6
TB1(30)
LOGIC OUTPUT 7
TB1(31)
SSR1 TB1(21/22)
SSR2 TB1(23/24)
RELAY COIL 1
TB2(1/3/5)























CLOSE
CONTACT
alarm
alarm+flt
auto brake
b. ena status
brake hold
brake pick
brk hold flt
brk pick flt
car going dwn
car going up
charge fault
close contact
contactor flt
curr reg flt
drv overload
encoder flt
fault
flux confirm
ground fault
in low gain
motor trq lim
mtr overload
no faults






















RELAY COIL 2
TB2(8/10/12)
C4
C4
C4
no function
not alarm
over curr flt
overspeed flt
overtemp flt
overvolt flt
ovrtemp alarm
phase fault
ramp down ena
ready 2 start
ready to run
regen trq lim
run commanded
run confirm
speed dev
speed dev low
speed ref rls
speed reg rls
undervolt flt
up to speed
uv alarm
zero speed
RUN
COMMANDED
MTR OVERLOAD
ENCODER FLT
FAULT
SPEED REG
RLS
SPEED REG
RLS
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
Analog Outputs C4 Submenu – See analog Outputs C4 submenu on page 72
 analog addr2
 pretorque ref
 analog addr3
 motor mode
 arb state
 spd rg tq cmd
SPEED REF
ANA OUT 1 TB1-12
 arm current
 speed command
 arm voltage
 speed error
 aux torq cmd
 speed feedbk
 bus voltage
 speed ref
 est motor spd
 tach rate cmd
ANA OUT 2 TB1-13
SPEED FEEDBK
 field current
 tach speed
 iarm error
 torque ref
- drive overload
 ls pwr input
9
Site
Setting
fixed
fixed
Quattro DC Quick Parameter Reference
Menu Parameter
Unit
D1
Elevator Data Submenu
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
Speed Command
Speed Reference
Speed Feedback
Motor Speed
Speed Error
Pre-Torque Ref
Pre-Torq Last
Ext-Torque Cmd
Spd Reg Torq Cmd
Tach Rate Cmd
Aux Torque Cmd
Est Inertia
Rx Com Status
RX Error Count
Logic Outputs
Logic Inputs
Rx Logic Input
Menu Parameter
D3
D3
D3
D3
D3
ft/min or m/sec
ft/min or m/sec
ft/min or m/sec
RPM
ft/min or m/sec
% of rated torque
% of rated torque
% of rated current
% of rated torque
% of rated torque
% of rated torque
Seconds
1 = true; 0 = false
Counts
1 = true; 0 = false
1 = true; 0 = false
1 = true; 0 = false
U1
U1
U1
U2
U2
U3
U3
U4
U4
U5
U5
U5
U5
Amps
Amps
Volts
Volts
None
%
%
ft/min or m/sec
ft/min or m/sec
none
none
°C
°C
°C
°C
Amps
mH
%
Ohm
Ohm
sec
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U6
U7
U7
U7
U7
U7
U7
U7
U8
U8
U8
U8
LS Power Data Submenu
LS Power Input
DC Bus Volts
DC Bus Volts Ref
LS Overload
LS Input Current
LS D Axis I
LS Q Axis I
LS D Axis V
%
Hz
Volts
Volts
°C
Menu Parameter
Unit
U1
Password U1 Submenu
MS Power Data Submenu
Armature Current
Field Current
Armature Voltage
MS Bus Voltage
Motor Mode
Motor Overload
Torque Ref
Est Spd Fdbk
Encoder Speed
Analog Addess2
Analog Addess3
DS Module Temp.
LS Module Temp.
Highest Temp.
Field IGBT Temp.
Armature Cur Err
Auto Meas Arm L
Auto Meas IRDrop
Auto Meas Arm R
Auto Field Res
Auto Field Tc
Unit
LS Q Axis V
Input Hz
Input Vab
Input Vca
LS Module Temp
kW
Volts
Volts
%
Amps
%
%
%
F1
F1
F1
F2
F2
F2
F2
10
Enter password
New password
Password Lockout
-
Hidden Items U2 Submenu
Hidden Items Enable
-
Units U3 Submenu
Units Selection
-
Ovrspeed Test U4 Submenu
Overspeed Test
-
Restore Dflts U5 Submenu
Restore Motor Defaults
Restore Drive Defaults
Restore Utility Defaults
-
Motor Side Info U6 Submenu
MS Type
MS Platform
Field Module
MS Code Version
MS S/W Date
MS S/W Time
MS PIB Module
MS FPGA Revision
MS Cube ID
-
Line Side Info U7 Submenu
LS Type
LS Code Version
LS S/W Date
LS S/W Time
LS FPGA Rev
LS Cube ID
-
Hex Monitor1 U8 Submenu
Addr1
Addr2&
Addr3&
-
Active Faults F1 Submenu
Display Active Faults
Reset Active Faults
-
Faults History F2 Submenu
Display Fault History
Clear Fault History
Display Fault Counters
-
Quattro DC Introduction
 User choice of P-I type or MagneTek
exclusive E-Reg, elevator velocity
regulators (see pages 66 and 66)
 Optional CEMF speed regulator for use
during initial construction stage start-up
 Torque Feed-Forward when available from
the car controller (see pg 25)
 Pre-Torque at drive start to reduce roll-back
(see pg 25)
 Controlled torque Ramp-Down to prevent
elevator brake thumping at stops (see pg 25)
 Internal frequency notch filter to reject rope
resonance interference (see pg 41)
 Closed loop motor field current regulator
with simplified motor field weakening and
stand-by adjustments
 Drive Stand-by Power Reduction (see pg 26)
 User selectable choices for relay logic
outputs, including (see Logic Outputs C3
submenu on pg 70):
 Drive OK / No Faults relay
 Alarms Relay
 Drive operating, OK to release brake
 Car above/below speed X threshold
 Car above/below Zero speed threshold
 Car Moving Up
 Car Moving Down
 Speed Error above/below X threshold for Y
secs
 Drive Standby Power Reduction (DSPR)
 Elevator Brake actuation
 User selectable analog trace outputs for
system diagnostics (see Analog Outputs C4
submenu on pg 72)
 Diagnostic indicator for verifying logic input
and output conditions
 Programmable Alarm Relay to indicate
important but non-critical conditions
 Motor thermostat over-temperature
 Motor Over-Load
 Drive Over-Heating
 Low Utility Line Input
 Safety related fault trapping with
diagnostics, including:
 Motor Over-Current
 Motor field Malfunction
 Contactor Failure
 Severe Utility Line disturbances
 Encoder Loss
 Over-Speed Trip
 User selectable automatic or external
commanded Fault Reset (see User
Switches C1 submenu on pages 56-64)
Introduction
Drive Ratings and Specifications
The Quattro drive is designed for connection to
a 4 wire grounded 3-phase input along with a
single-phase 230 VAC control power input.
Basic Drive Specifications
 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 amps DC armature
output (Elevator Run Current) at up to
550VDC in 2 basic model sizes
 150% overload for 60 seconds
 250% overload for 6 seconds
 Up to 40 ADC motor field control
 <8% utility input current harmonics at full
power (<5% on 125 amp unit)
 Unity Power Factor (1.0 Service Factor)
 0–45ºC (32–115ºF) ambient temp range
 Fully regenerative operation
 Includes motor armature contactor w/
provision for armature DB resistors
 4+ Million Start-Stop operating cycles
 (9) 24VDC Programmable Logic Inputs
 (11) Programmable Logic Outputs:
 (7) 24VDC
 (2) Solid-State Relays
 (2) Relays
 5V or 12V Isolated encoder power source
w/ differential receivers
Service Conditions
 Required: 200-480 VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz
input power, Line Impedance Z < 6%
 Required: 220-240 VAC, single-phase
control power, 50/60 Hz,2.6 amps (min).
Software Operating Features
The General Purpose Quattro-DC elevator
drive is a four-quadrant torque and speed
regulated motor drive with low power line
harmonic currents and unity power factor. It
can be configured to operate geared and
gearless elevators and lifts. Basic features
include...
 User choice of operating speed reference
(see pg 25)
 External analog reference follower
 Serial link reference follower
 Internal reference generator with
controlled S-Curve smoothing to one of 15
preset speeds
 User choice of ft/min or m/sec speed
programming and display units (see pg 79)
 User choice of input control logic for Run-Up /
Run-Down or Run / Direction relay control
with internal preset speeds (see pg 25)
11
Quattro DC Introduction
Drive Model Numbers
The final option section determines the type of
motor contactor requested, Armature Filter,
Field Filter, Low Voltage Field Supply, and
Magnetek Operator. The Magnetek Operator
is not required to start running, but allows for
easy access to parameters, overspeed test,
and auto tuning. For more information on the
Low Voltage Field Supply (LV Field Supply),
please see Low Voltage Field Module on page
143. For instances where the Low Voltage
Field Module will work, it is recommended by
Magnetek.
The Quattro DC drive is currently available
with five different output currents and a variety
of options.
The enclosure option consists of a customer
I/O panel. The customer I/O panel is an
optional larger width cabinet that allows for
customer interfacing within the supplied
cabinet. See Dimensions / Weights on page
130.
QDC
-1
-
drive
output current rating
125 = 125A output current
150 = 150A output current
200 = 200A output current
250 = 250A output current
300 = 300A output current
options
00 = No Operator, Single Contactor, No Filters, Std Field Supply
01 = Operator, Single Contactor, No Filters, Std Field Supply
02 = No Operator, Dual Contactor, No Filters, Std Field Supply
03 = Operator, Dual Contactor, No Filters, Std Field Supply
04 = No Operator, Single Contactor, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
05 = Operator, Single Contactor, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
06 = No Operator, Dual Contactor, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
07 = Operator, Dual Contactor, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
08 = No Operator, Single Contactor, Field Filter, Std Field Supply
09 = Operator, Single Contactor, Field Filter, Std Field Supply
0A = No Operator, Dual Contactor, Field Filter, Std Field Supply
0B = Operator, Dual Contactor, Field Filter, Std Field Supply
0C = No Operator, Single Contactor, Field Filter, Arm Filter, Std Field
Supply
0D = Operator, Single Contactor, Field Filter, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
0E = No Operator, Dual Contactor, Field Filter, Arm Filter, Std Field
Supply
0F = Operator, Dual Contactor, Field Filter, Arm Filter, Std Field Supply
10 = No Operator, Single Contactor, No Filters, LV Field Supply
11 = Operator, Single Contactor, No Filters, LV Field Supply
12 = No Operator, Dual Contactor, No Filters, LV Field Supply
13 = Operator, Dual Contactor, No Filters, LV Field Supply
14 = No Operator, Single Contactor, Arm Filter, LV Field Supply
15 = Operator, Single Contactor, Arm Filter, LV Field Supply
16 = No Operator, Dual Contactor, Arm Filter, LV Field Supply
17 = Operator, Dual Contactor, Arm Filter, LV Field Supply
enclosure options
6 = no customer I/O panel
7 = customer I/O panel
auto transformer options
0 = no Auto Transformer included
3 = 480VAC:380VAC transformer 60Hz
4 = 575VAC:380VAC transformer 60Hz
5 = 208VAC:380VAC transformer 60Hz
6 = 240VAC:380VAC transformer 60Hz
7 = 208VAC:480VAC transformer 60Hz
8 = 240VAC:480VAC transformer 60Hz
9 = 380VAC:480VAC transformer 50/60Hz
A = 400VAC:480VAC transformer 50/60Hz
B = 415VAC:480VAC transformer 50/60Hz
C = 575VAC:480VAC transformer 60Hz
D = 380VAC:208VAC transformer 60Hz
E = 380VAC:240VAC transformer 60Hz
F = 480VAC:208VAC transformer 60Hz
G = 480VAC:240VAC transformer 60Hz
H = 480VAC:400VAC transformer 50/60Hz
I = 480VAC:415VAC transformer 50/60Hz
J = 480VAC:380VAC transformer 50/60Hz
K = 380VAC:480VAC transformer 60Hz
L = 600VAC:480VAC transformer 60Hz
M = 600VAC:380VAC transformer 60Hz
N = 600VAC:240VAC transformer 60Hz
P = 600VAC:150VAC transformer 60Hz
Q = 415VAC:240VAC transformer 50/60Hz
control transformer options
1 = no control transformer included
3 = 208VAC input to control transformer
4 = 230VAC input to control transformer
5 = 240VAC input to control transformer
6 = 416VAC input to control transformer
7 = 460VAC input to control transformer
8 = 480VAC input to control transformer
9 = 550VAC input to control transformer
A = 575VAC input to control transformer
B = 600VAC input to control transformer
12
Quattro DC Startup Guide
Quattro startup guide
7.
Initial Inspection
Unpacking
1. When unpacking, check drive for any
shipping damage.
2. If Quattro needs to be lifted, see spare
parts list on page Error! Bookmark not
defined. for lifting kit part number.
3. Review the technical manual.
4. Verify the proper drive model numbers and
voltage ratings as specified on the
purchase order.
5. Location of the Quattro is important for
proper operation of the drive and normal
life expectancy.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Installation
The installation should comply with the
following:
 DO NOT mount in direct sunlight, rain or
extreme (condensing) humidity.
 DO NOT mount where corrosive gases or
liquids are present.
 AVOID exposure to vibration, airborne dust
or metallic particles.
 DO NOT allow the ambient temperature
around the control to exceed the ambient
temperature listed in the specification.
incoming power, control power, DC
armature wires, and DC shunt field.
Use UL/CSA certified connectors sized for
the selected wire gauge. Install
connectors using the crimping tools
specified by the connector manufacturer.
Control wire lead length should not exceed
20m (60 ft). Signal leads and feedback
leads should be run in separate conduits
from power and motor wiring.
Verify that the input voltage matches the
drive’s rating.
Verify that the motor is wired for the
application voltage and amperage.
Tighten all of the three-phase power and
ground connections. See Wire Terminal
Specs on page 128 for torque specs.
Check that all control and signal
terminations are also tight.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
DRIVE. THE FOLLOWING CHECKS MUST
BE PERFORMED BEFORE APPLYING THE
INPUT POWER.
 During shipping, connections may loosen;
inspect all equipment for signs of damage,
loose connections, or other defects.
 Ensure the three-phase line voltage is
within 10% of the nominal input voltage.
Also verify the frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
correct for the elevator control system.
 Remove all shipping devices.
 Ensure all electrical connections are
secure.
 Ensure all transformers are connected for
proper voltage.
 Open F1 and F2 and ensure control power
brought into fuse F1 and F2 is 230VAC!
Observe the following precautions:
1. Wiring guide lines
 For Logic Input and Output I/O
connections, use quality, multi-conductor
cable or discrete stranded wire only.
 For Encoder and Analog I/O connections,
use quality, multi-conductor braided shield
cable*.
 For Communication I/O connections, use
quality, multi-conductor braided shield*
cable or twisted pair wire.
*Cable shields to be terminated with a 180/360
degree metal cable clamp attached to Control
Tray panel flange.
2. Never connect main AC power to the
output terminals
3. Never allow wire leads to contact metal
surfaces. Short circuit may result.
4. SIZE OF WIRE MUST BE SUITABLE FOR
CLASS I CIRCUITS.
5. Motor lead length should not exceed 20m
(60 ft). If lead length must exceed this
distance, contact Magnetek for proper
installation procedures.
6. The following are required to be contained
in individual conduit runs: 3-phase
IMPORTANT: Double-check all the power
wires and motor wires to make sure that they
are securely tightened down to their respective
lugs (loose wire connections may cause
problems at any time).
Grounding considerations
1. Encoder
a. Encoder isolation
 The encoder must be electrically
isolated from the motor frame and
the motor shaft.
b. Encoder cable
i. The cable type should be PVC
braided shielded type with three
22ga twisted pairs. A and A/,
B and B/, common and V should be
the signals paired together.
13
Quattro DC Startup Guide
ii. The encoder shield is not to be
connected at the encoder end. On
the drive side of the cable a portion
of PVC material 1inch [25mm]
should be removed approximately
12inches [300mm] from the
connection to the customer interface
PCB (A6) to expose the shield
material. This point is required to be
secured under a clamp located
under the control tray. Do not
connect the shield to any other point.
2. Motor frame
a. The motor frame is required to be
grounded. The bond wire should be
returned to the common ground point
located in the Quattro enclosure (PE).
3. Three phase power
a. The three phase wires must be run
with a ground wire. This ground wire,
which is connected back to the utility
ground, is required to be connected to
the Quattro ground (PE).
4. Control power, 230VAC
a. The neutral side of the control power is
required to be grounded at the Quattro
ground (PE).
Initial adjustments after power up
Encoder Set-up
Electrical interference and mechanical speed
modulations are common problems that can
result in improper speed feedback getting to
the drive. To help avoid these common
problems, the following electrical and
mechanical considerations are suggested.
IMPORTANT
Proper encoder speed feedback is essential
for a drive to provide proper motor control.
Electrical Requirements:
 Insulate both the encoder case and shaft
from the motor
 Incremental encoder type
 Use twisted pair cable with shield tied to
chassis ground at drive end
 Use limited slew rate differential line
drivers
 Do not allow capacitors from internal
encoder electronics to case
 Do not exceed the operating specification
of the encoder/drive (300Khz @ rated
motor speed maximum)
 Use the proper encoder supply voltage
and use the highest possible voltage
available. The Quattro DC provides both
5VDC and 12VDC. Magnetek
recommends using the 12VDC for the
encoder supply.
Mechanical Considerations:
 Use direct motor mounting without
couplings
 Use hub or hollow shaft encoder with
concentric motor stub shaft
 If possible, use a mechanical protective
cover for exposed encoders
 It is not advisable to use friction wheels
Enter / Verify the encoder pulses entered in
the ENCODER PULSES (A1) parameter
matches the encoder’s nameplate.
Motor Parameter Set-up
Enter / Verify the following from the motor’s
nameplate:
1. Motor Current (RATED MTR CURRENT
(A6))
2. Motor Voltage (RATED ARM VOLTS (A6))
3. Motor field amps, forcing (FULL FLD
AMPS (A6))
4. Motor field amps, running (WEAK FLD
AMPS (A6))
5. Motor field amps, standing (STNDBY
FIELD (A6))
14
Quattro DC Startup Guide
Hoist way Parameter Set-up
Enter / Verify the hoist way parameters:
1. CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter
programs the elevator contract speed in
ft/min or m/s.
2. CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameter
programs the motor speed at elevator
contract speed in RPM.
Low speed inspection mode
Run the drive in low speed inspection mode
and…
1. Verify encoder polarity, the motor rotation
should match the encoder phasing. The
equivalent of swapping A and /A can be
done with the ENCODER CONNECT (C1)
parameter.
Line voltage setup
Enter / Verify the line voltage parameter:
1. INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) parameter
programs the line voltage level
2. Verify proper hoist way direction. This can
be reversed with the MOTOR ROTATION
(C1) parameter.
WARNING
If using an external speed regulator, which
produces an analog torque command to
Quattro (SPEED REG TYPE (C1) =
external reg and EXT TORQ CMD SRC
(C1) = analog input), it is imperative that
the encoder polarity matches the armature
voltage. To verify polarity, insert a torque
command into the analog input. Check
ENCODER SPD (D2) against ARMATURE
VOLTAGE (D2). Verify they are the same
polarity. If not, swap A and /A or change
the ENCODER CONNECT (C1) parameter.
Auto tune Procedure
Refer to page 111 on how to implement Auto
tune if desired. Auto tune will automatically
measure the motor’s armature inductance,
armature resistance including cable resistance,
field resistance, and field time constant. Auto
tune will also calculate the armature resistance
voltage drop at motor rated current and the
armature and field regulation gains.
(C1, C2, C3, C4) configuration setup
It will be required to adjust the configuration
menus to operate the Quattro as the elevator
manufacturer has specified to interact with the
car controller. Magnetek does not supply this
data.
Verify that the Safety Chain / Emergency Stop
works.
15
Quattro DC Interconnections
Interconnections
QUATTRO SIGNAL
CONNECTIONS – A6
TB1
2
CTR PWR Sense
LED2
LOGIC INPUTS
*Located on A8TB4
LI2
LED12
LED5
LED13
LI5
6
LI6
LED6
LED14
7
LI7
LED7
LED15
8
LI8
LED8
LED16
9
LI9
LED9
10
LIB
43
C_24VISO
44
C_24VISO
45
C_24VISO
46
+24 VISO
34
/A
38
/Z
39
Z
40
C_ISO
41
+5VISO
42
+12VISO
15
AIN1+
16
AIN1-
17
ACOM
18
AIN2+
19
AIN2-
Corresponding LED
on A6 Board
LED17
LED18
To / From
Encoder,
Use +5 or +12
volt Supply
Power As
Required.
14
BB_2
BASE
ENABLE
JUMPER
BB 1
LO4 28
LO5 29
To contactor
pickup Relay K on
A8
Open collector
Outputs, 30VDC,
150mA max
LO6 30
LO7 31
C_24VISO
33
C_24VISO
45
SSR1
SSR2
Corresponding LED
on A6 Board
21
22
23
Solid State relay
Outputs,
50V AC/DC
Max 150mA Max
24
A01 12
A02 13
Analog Outputs,
+/- 10 VDC,
+/- 4mA
AC 14
TB2
Relay 1
LED19
1
3
5
Relays, 230 VAC
1A or 30VDC 2A
8
Relay 2
LED20
10
12
JC4
TB2
7
LO3 27
A8JCC1-3
LOC 32
ANALOG INPUTS
+/- 10 V
PreTorque Cmd or
Torque Command
LO2 26
LI4
ENCODER
Speed Command
LED11
LED4
5
B
11
LED3
LI3
37
47
+24VISO
LO1 25
4
A
36 /B
+24VISO
LED10
3
35
To/ From
Encoder, Use
+5 or +12 Volt
supply power
Corresponding LED
on A6 Board
LOGIC OUTPUTS
A8JCC1-1
TB1
SS RELAYS
6*
11 +24 VISO
Corresponding LED1
on A6 Board
LED1
1
LI1
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
A8JCC1-2
RELAYS
5*
Contact
Cfirm
1
Note: Input LEDs do not
take into account setting
of N.C. Inputs (C2)
SERIAL CONNECTION
A8JCC1-4
Figure 1: Interconnection Diagram
16
+5V_SA
-RTSA
+CTSA
TXRX+
TXRXRXRX+
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
COM_SA 5
RS422
Customer
Serial Link
Quattro DC Interconnections
L(1) L(2) L(3) *** Note 3
GND
Control Power
* Note 1
230VAC hi
230VAC lo
To Quattro Drive
* Note 1
F1
F2
Provided for
the Primary
side of the
230V control
power
transformer
4
Safety Chain
A24
TB1
SWout (+) 2
Motor Field Control
3
Located on A8
Field Filter TB3-1A
Field DB
option
Option
DCout (-)
TB3-2A
3
TB3-2
(F2)
Armature
Filter Option
(F1)
* Note 1
ME
ME
ME
(21) (22)
(13) (14)
(43) (44)
TB3-3
K1
DBR
1-4**
Part of A9
ME
ME
DBR (A1) * Note 1
5-8**
Hoist Motor
(A2)
(5) (6)
TB3-4
(2) (1)
TB3-6
Encoder to
A6TB1
Figure 2: Quattro DC Power Connections
17
Safety Chain
1. * indicates components not
supplied by Magnetek
2. **indicates components supplied
upon request
3. ***indicates external 3-phase
fusing. See Appendix for fuse
recommendations
TB3-7
(4) (3)
TB4 * Note 1
1
Notes:
Motor Contactor Auxiliaries
ME
2
TB3-1
L4
M otor S hunt F ield
H(X) H(1)
TB4K1 K1 TB4 ME TB4
* Note 1
Internal Control
Power
Quattro DC Interconnections
Logic Inputs
The Quattro DC’s nine programmable logic
inputs are opto-isolated. For more information
on programming logic inputs, see Logic Inputs
C2 submenu on page 68. The inputs become
“true” by closing contacts or switches between
the logic input terminal and voltage source
common (or voltage source). The inputs are
sourcing inputs – nominally sitting at common
and when the contacts or switches are closed,
turning “true” at 24VDC. The voltage supply for
the logic inputs is 24VDC.
IMPORTANT
Internal 24VDC power supply has a capacity of
100 mA
Note: Logic input 1 and 2 are reserved and prewired for CONTACT CFIRM and CTR PWR
SENSE respectively.
The choices for the voltage source common (or
voltage source) depend on if the user is using
an external voltage supply or using the internal
voltage supply. See Figure 5 for internal supply
example and Figure 7 for external supply
example.
TB1
Encoder Connections
The Quattro DC has connections for an
incremental two-channel quadrature encoder.
The Quattro DC requires the use of an encoder
coupled to the motor shaft. The encoder power
can be either a +5VDC or +12VDC.
The encoder pulses per revolution must be
entered in the ENCODER PULSES parameter
in the A1 submenu.
Figure 3 shows the encoder connection
terminals for non-single ended applications.
TB1
34
/A
35
A
36
/B
37
B
38
/Z
39
Z
40
C_ISO
41
+5V_ISO
42
+12V_ISO
Contact
A8TB1 Cfirm A8JCC1-2
6
5
A8JCC1-1
Figure 3: Encoder Connections
TB1
/A
35
A
36
/B
37
B
38
/Z
39
Z
40
C_ISO
41
+5V_ISO
42
+12V_ISO
+24VDC isolated
1
logic input 1
2
logic input 2
3
logic input 3
4
logic input 4
5
logic input 5
6
logic input 6
7
logic input 7
8
logic input 8
9
logic input 9
10
logic input common
43
+24VDC iso. common
44
+24VDC iso. common
45
+24VDC iso. common
46
+24VDC isolated
CTR PWR Sense
Below shows the connection for the encoder
option card, if they are configured to be single
ended. This configuration is not recommended,
since, the Quattro DC encoder noise immunity
circuitry is not in effect.
34
11
Figure 4: Encoder Connections (SingleEnded)
Figure 5: Logic Input Diagram (Internal
Supply – true high)
18
Quattro DC Interconnections
TB1
Contact
A8TB1 Cfirm A8JCC1-2
6
5
A8JCC1-1
TB1
44
+24VDC iso common
1
logic input 1
2
logic input 2
44
Contact
Cfirm A8JCC1-2
A8TB1
1
6
5
A8JCC1-1
logic input 2
logic input 3
3
logic input 3
4
logic input 4
4
logic input 4
5
logic input 5
5
logic input 5
6
logic input 6
6
logic input 6
7
logic input 7
7
logic input 7
8
logic input 8
8
logic input 8
9
logic input 9
9
logic input 9
10
logic input common
10
logic input common
43
C_24VISO
45
C 24VISO
+
+24V external
+24VDC iso. common
45
+24VDC iso. common
46
+24VDC isolated
supply
Figure 8: Logic Inputs (External Supply –
true low)
Figure 6: Logic Input Diagram (Internal
Supply – true low)
TB1
11
Contact
Cfirm A8JCC1-2
A8TB1
1
6
5
Analog Inputs
The Quattro DC has two non-programmable
differential analog input channels.
 Analog input channel 1 is reserved for the
speed command (if used).
 Analog input channel 2 is reserved for the
pre-torque command (if used) or torque
command source (if used).
The analog input channels are bipolar and have
a voltage range of 10VDC.
Available with the analog channels is multiplier
gain parameters (SPD COMMAND MULT and
EXT TORQUE MULT) and bias parameters
(SPD COMMAND BIAS and EXT TORQUE
BIAS). These parameters are used to scale the
user’s analog command to the proper range for
the drive software. The formula below shows
the scaling effects of these two parameters.
+24VDC isolated
logic input 1
2
logic input 2
3
logic input 3
4
logic input 4
5
logic input 5
6
logic input 6
7
logic input 7
8
logic input 8
9
logic input 9
CTR PWR Sense
+
2
3
43
+24V external
supply
logic input 1
CTR PWR Sense
CTR PWR Sense
A8JCC1-1
C_24VISO
10
logic input common
43
C_24VISO
44
C 24VISO
 analog
 channel

 input
 voltage
Figure 7: Logic Inputs (External Supply –
true high)
19


 BIAS   MULT



signal
drive
software
uses
Quattro DC Interconnections
For more on the multiplier gain or bias
parameters, see Drive A1 submenu on page 33.
The scaling of the analog input signals, with
BIAS set to 0.00 and MULT set to 1.0 follows:
 Speed Command
+10VDC = positive contract speed
-10VDC = negative contract speed
 Pre Torque Command
+10VDC = positive rated pre-torque of motor
-10VDC = negative rated pre-torque of motor
 Torque Command
+10VDC = positive rated torque of motor
-10VDC = negative rated torque of motor
NOTE: The drive cannot recognize voltages
outside of the 10VDC on its analog input
channels.
The Quattro DC provides common mode noise
rejection with the differential analog inputs. The
connection of these two differential inputs is
shown in Figure 9.
TB1
Speed Cmd
±10V
PreTorque
Cmd, ±10V
or Torque
Command, ±10V
15
analog input 1+
16
analog input 1-
17
analog input common
18
analog input 2+
19
analog input 2-
Figure 9: Analog Inputs (Differential)
Figure 10 shows the connection for the analog
inputs if they are configured for single-ended
connection. In this configuration, the Quattro
DC noise immunity circuitry is not in effect.
Note: For prevention of ground noise
interference, a twisted shielded pair must be run
to the source and not connected at the board.
TB1
Speed Cmd
±10V
PreTorque
Cmd, ±10V
or Torque
Command, ±10V
15
analog input 1+
16
analog input 1-
17
analog input common
18
analog input 2+
19
analog input 2-
Figure 10: Analog Inputs (Single Ended)
20
Quattro DC Interconnections
Logic Outputs
The Quattro DC’s seven programmable logic
outputs are opto-isolated, open collector. The
outputs are normally open and can withstand an
applied maximum voltage of 30VDC. When the
outputs become “true”, the output closes and is
capable of sinking up to 150mA between the
logic output terminal and the logic output
common (TB1-32). Figure 11: Logic Outputs
shows the logic output terminals.
Note: Logic Output 1 is prewired for CLOSE
CONTACT.
Relay Outputs
The Quattro DC’s two programmable relay logic
outputs are Form-C relays. The have both
normally open and normally closed contacts.
The specifications for each relay are as follows:
Relay 1
 2A at 30VDC or 1A at 230VAC
Relay 2
 2A at 30VDC or 1A at 230VAC
Figure 12: Relay Outputs shows the logic output
terminals.
TB2
TB1
1
+24V iso.
47
+24V iso.
11
logic output 1
25
5
logic output 2
26
8
logic output 3
27
logic output 4
28
logic output 5
29
logic output 6
30
Figure 12: Relay Outputs
logic output 7
31
logic output common
32
For more information on programming the relay
outputs, see Logic Outputs C3 submenu on
page 70.
+24V iso. common
33
+24V iso. common
45
A8JCC1-3
relay 1
relay 2
3
10
12
Solid State Relay Outputs
The Quattro DC has two programmable solidstate relays. They have a 30 VDC max with
150mA load capability.
Figure 13: Solid State Relay Outputs shows the
relay output connections.
TB1
Figure 11: Logic Outputs
For more information on programming the logic
outputs, see Logic Outputs C3 submenu on
page 70.
solid state relay 1
21
22
solid state relay 2
23
24
Figure 13: Solid State Relay Outputs
For more information on programming the solidstate relays, see Logic Outputs C3 submenu on
page 70.
21
Quattro DC Interconnections
For more on the gain or offset parameters, see
section Drive A1 submenu on page 33.
Analog Outputs
The Quattro DC has two programmable
differential analog output channels. The two
analog output channels were designed for
diagnostic help. For more information on
programming the analog output channels, see
Analog Outputs C4 submenu on page 72.
The analog output channels are bipolar and
have a voltage range of 10VDC and current
draw of +/- 4mA.
Available with the analog channels is multiplier
gain parameters (ANA 1 OUT GAIN and ANA 2
OUT GAIN) and a bias or offset parameters
(ANA 1 OUT OFFSET and ANA 2 OUT
OFFSET). These parameters are used to scale
the user’s analog outputs to the proper range for
the drive software. The formula below shows
the scaling effects of these two parameters.
The connection of these two outputs is shown in
Figure 14: Analog Outputs.
TB1
analog output 1
12
analog output 2
13
analog output com
14
Figure 14: Analog Outputs
For more information on programming the
Analog Outputs, see Analog Outputs C4
submenu on page 72.
analog
 signal

 drive

channel
 OFFSET  GAIN 

output
 software

creates
voltage


22
Quattro DC Drive Sequencing
Drive Sequencing
NORMAL operating sequence
1. Motor field current is at Stand-By during
drive idle. The No Faults relay is active.
Full-Field and Run command signals are
OFF. Motor contactor Safety circuits may
be open or closed. The DC bus will
remain charged with regulated voltage as
long as the drive is providing motor field
current.
2. A Field Enable Command, programmable
by FLD ENA SRC (C1), is sent to the
drive. If the DC bus is not pre-charged, a
pre-charge cycle will be completed before
motor field current is restored. See
Quattro Pre-Charge on page 24 for timing
information of the Pre-Charge circuit.
Motor field current will go to the Full-Field
value in preparation to produce motor
torque. Flux Confirm will become active
when motor field current rises above the
Flux Cnfrm Level (A6).
4. The motor contactor will be told to close
when motor field current rises above the Flux
Confirm threshold and there are valid Enable
and Run commands with no drive Faults. Once
the contactor is confirmed to be closed,
regulators are released, always starting with
the velocity reference at zero speed and motor
current at pre-torque amperes.
5. The drive will activate elevator Brake relays,
if programmed to do so (or the car controller
does it externally).
6. Once the Brake is confirmed to be released
(by feedback or timer) the internal Speed
Reference will be released and the drive will
follow the external or internal velocity profile
via the programmed accel/decel rate as
programmed during the remainder of the
elevator run cycle.
7. When at the next landing...the Drive (or car
controller) de-activates elevator Brake. After
the Brake has set, the Run command is
removed causing...
8. The reference speed to be clamped to zero
and motor torque to ramp down to aero.
9. When torque ramp-down is complete the
contactor will be told to open.
Field Enable
Motor Field
Stndy Fld
Full Fld
FLUX CFRM
(logic output)
Drive Enable
Run
3. Pre-Torque command value is sent to the
drive. It must be available before a Run
command is given. If the Pre-Torque
Latch is used, see Pre-Torque Latch (C1),
it can be placed inactive depending on the
settings of Pre-Torque Latch Clk (C1). If
latching is not used, it must remain active
until the SPD REG RLS output is active.
Safety circuit relays are closed making
power available to the contactor coil
circuit.
Brake Relay
Run
SPD REG RLS (logic output)
Torque
Motor Contactor
Pre-Torque
10. While idle, motor field current reference will
drop to Stand-By, after the Full-Field timer
expires. Safety circuit relays may (or may not)
open to remove contactor-actuating power. A
DSPR time-out may occur while field current is
at stand-by. In that case motor field current
goes to zero and the AC main power contactor
to the drive is opened. A pre-charge cycle and
power on recovery will occur on the next
command to re-establish motor field current.
Run
Safety Chain
CONTACT
CFRM (input)
SPD REG RLS
(output)
23
Quattro DC Drive Sequencing
3. DC bus is Pre-Charged
a. With pre-charge contactor PCM closed,
voltage builds up on the internal DC
capacitors.
b. DC Bus voltage is monitored during
pre-charge to verify proper voltage
build-up vs time. (See 6.a. below)
c. Target bus voltage is measured input
VAC X √2.
4. Mains contactor is closed
a. As measured DC bus voltage nears
target value the main utility power
contactor UTM closes.
b. Aux contact feedback from UTM
indicates to controls that main utility
contactor is closed.
c. Then Pre-charge contactor PCM is
opened. (See 6.b. below)
5. Boost converter is turned ON.
a. DC bus voltage is boosted to a higher
level as programmed by the Boost
voltage parameter (A5) in order to
achieve near unity power factor and low
harmonic content of the Quattro drive.
b. Motor field controls also turn ON to
begin regulating motor field current
and/or operate main motor armature
circuits.
c. The boost converter will remain ON as
long as any field or armature current is
being provided to the motor. (See 6.c.
below) Time-out of the DSPR (Drive
Stand-by Power Reduction) feature or
other command may turn the Boost
converter OFF when drive is idle. In
that case as new pre-charge cycle must
occur before drive re-start.
6. Problem prevention
a. If DC bus voltage does not rise at the
expected rate to the expected voltage
level during pre-charge a “Charge
Fault” is declared.
b. UTM and PCM are interlocked with aux
contacts such that UTM cannot be
picked unless PCM is already closed.
Once picked, an aux contact of UTM
seals the same circuit allowing PCM to
be dropped with UTM remaining ON.
c. In the event of a major drive Fault, UTM
will be opened to disconnect utility lines
from main power devices of Quattro.
ABNORMAL operating sequence
1. If a Drive Fault occurs the Drive will
immediately open the motor contactor, deenergize any Brake and Drive OK Relays
if so programmed. May be caused by:
a. “Fatal Error” drive Faults including loss
of serial communications
b. Opening of the contactor power Safety
circuit while the contactor is pulled in
c. Loss of correct motor contactor or
Brake Relay feedback.
2. If an Alarm occurs, the drive will signal an
Alarm but continue to run. May be caused
by:
a. Drive Alarms including motor overload,
and drive over temp warning
b. Loss of correct feedback from Brake
Hold relay or Brake Switches
c. Open motor thermostat circuit
d. Speed command is held at zero due to
conflict with the analog speed
command polarity and the run up/ run
down logic
e. The drive is or was being limited by
the motor torque limit setting (Hit
Torque Limit)
f. Speed feedback is failing to properly
track the speed reference (Speed Dev)
g. AC input voltage drops below user
specified percent of the input line to
line voltage
Quattro Pre-Charge
When power is first applied to the Quattro
drive, or after it has shut itself down via a
DSPR time-out, the internal DC bus must be
pre-charged before operation can resume.
The following sequence will occur:
1. Power is applied to the Quattro drive
a. Control power may be applied before or
after 3-phase main power
b. Drive controls should become active
but no contactors should operate
2. Quattro drive receives command to
‘energize’
a. This command may be from serial link
software or hardware logic command to
deliver motor field current in
preparation to start.
b. AC input voltage from mains is
measured and verified to be adequate
according to the setting of the VACinput adjustment parameter.
c. Pre-charge contactor PCM is then
pulled in. This provides resistor limited
inrush current to DC bus capacitors
from AC mains and internal rectifier.
24
Quattro DC Drive Operation and Feature Overview
requires SPD COMMAND SRC (C1) to be set
to SERIAL.
Drive Operation and
Feature Overview
Pre-Torque
The Quattro DC drive is a velocity and torque
regulated motor drive designed specifically for
operating elevators. Many of the features
described below can be selectively
programmed to customize an individual
application.
When enabled, the speed error integrator will
be pre-conditioned by the supplied pre-torque
signal before starting the regulator. This will
cause motor armature current to begin at a
magnitude proportional to the pre-torque
command to prevent elevator motion or
rollback when the elevator brake is released.
The pre-torque signal will be from either an
analog (wired at A6TB1-18 and A6TB1-19) or
serial link digital source as selected by
programming PRETORQUE SOURCE (C1). If
Pre-Torque is not used, leave PRETORQUE
SOURCE (C1) at the defaulted value of none.
An EXT TORQUE BIAS (A1) and an EXT
TORQUE MULT (A1) are available to scale the
pre-torque signal. Ten volts = rated motor
current with a multiplier of 1 and a bias of zero.
Analog Velocity Follower
The elevator car controller provides an analog
velocity reference to the drive at A6TB1-15
and A6TB1-16. The signal may be bi-polar +/10 VDC to indicate speed and travel direction,
or a positive only unipolar signal with the
direction of travel selected by logic commands.
In most cases the signal profile will be adjusted
by the car controller for precise landing
positioning. The velocity reference passes
directly to the closed loop velocity controller,
except for an internal rate limiter to buffer any
unexpected electrical noise. Start and Stop
commands are via 24VDC logic inputs.
Calibration of the analog velocity reference
signal may be adjusted with separate gain and
offset parameters. To set the Analog Velocity
Follower, the user must set SPD COMMAND
SRC (C1) to Analog Input.
Torque Feed Forward
Some car controllers may calculate an
accurate demand for motor torque as required
to accelerate the connected load as well as
hold it against gravity. The torque demand
signal can be programmed to directly drive the
torque control part of Quattro from either an
analog or serial link input. EXT TORQ CMD
SRC (C1) must be set to either analog input or
serial and SPEED REG TYPE (C1) must be
set to either pi speed reg, elev spd reg, or
external reg. The connections for an analog
external torque command source are A6TB118 and A6TB1-19. With an accurate torque
compensating signal, the gain of the PI
regulator can be reduced, to better ignore and
not amplify mechanical vibrations of the hoist
way. Separate adjustments are provided for
torque signal gain and offset. An EXT
TORQUE BIAS (A1) and an EXT TORQUE
MULT (A1) are available to scale the torque
signal. Ten volts = rated motor current with a
multiplier of 1 and a bias of zero.
Preset Speed & Profile Generator
An alternate method of speed control is that
the elevator car controller provides 24VDC
logic input commands to select one of 15 predetermined running speeds. The drive
generates a smooth S-Curve acceleration
profile to transition between speed selections.
Either of three separately adjustable ramp
times may be selected. The direction of travel
may be determined by either a Run command
with an Up/Down command signal or by
separate Run-Up / Run-Down logic
commands. To set the Analog Velocity
Follower, the user must set SPD COMMAND
SRC (C1) to Multi-Step, then adjusting MultiStep Speed Commands in the Multi-Step
Submenu A3.
Torque/Current Ramp-Down
When the drive is told to cease operation by
removal of the Run logic command, (and after
Brake Drop time if that function is engaged)
the armature current reference ramps down to
zero at a constant rate. This allows the
mechanical Brake to gently assume elevator
holding torque, reducing the tendency to
‘thump’ the brake. When armature current
ramp-down is complete, the contactor will be
opened. In the event that the contactor opens
unexpectedly, as reported by the feedback
contact or in the event of a severe drive fault,
Serial Link Follower
The elevator car controller provides the
equivalent of an analog reference command
over a digital serial link. The drive returns
operating status conditions and messages.
Primary run command are 24VDC logic for
redundant safety if wanted. The speed
sensitivity of the serial velocity reference is
adjustable. Enabling the serial link follower
25
Quattro DC Drive Operation and Feature Overview
there will be no timed delay for current rampdown. This time may be adjusted by the
function RAMPED STOP TIME (A1).
Over-Speed Test
A reference speed multiplier is provided to help
testing of the elevator governor over-speed
trip. This feature will automatically return to
normal at the completion of each elevator run.
However, to ensure that the drive Over-Speed
Trip does not interfere with the governor test,
one must temporarily raise the value set for the
Drive Over-Speed Trip point to a value higher
than that of the governor.
Motor Field Current Control and Field
weakening
DC elevator motors have a separately excited
shunt field. Adjustments include Stand-By
Current, Full-Field Current and Weak-Field
Current, all programmed in amperes, and a
Flux Confirm Level, programmed as a % of
Full-Field. With no active Full-Field or drive
Run command motor field current would
normally be at Stand-By amps. An active
command to provide Full Field causes field
current to increase to the Full Field setting.
When Field current is greater than the FullField threshold setting (and there are no other
faults) the DC motor contactor will be enabled
to pull in when told to do so by an active drive
Run command. When the motor contactor is
acknowledged as being closed, the motor
armature current regulator is released to follow
the commanded torque reference current
signal. Motor field current will remain at the
Full-Field value as long as the per unit (pu)
reference or measured speed (whichever is
greater) is less than the pu ratio of WF/FF
amps. Above that speed motor field current
will automatically follow the constant CEMF
profile of WF/FF X 1/spd, where speed is again
the greater active value of reference or
measured speed. When motor speed reduces
from high speed, motor field current
automatically increases according to the
constant CEMF calculated profile. However,
field current will not increase to be more than
the Full field ampere setting.
Fault & Alarm Reset
An external Fault Reset command signal from
the car controller may be applied to a logic
input or from a serial command link. Or, an
automatic Fault Reset will occur 5 seconds
after a drive fault occurs, when enabled to do
so. Either method may be used to enable the
car controller to quickly recover from a resettable fault. One Fault will be subtracted
from a fault count accumulation every 20
minutes. The maximum number of AutoResets that can be accumulated is 5. The
Auto-Reset function will then require a power
Off/On cycle in order to recover. Faults &
Alarms may also be cleared by use of the
Magnetek Operator.
Electronic Motor Over-Load
An electronic motor over-load function is
provided to take the place of heater type power
components. Motor armature current is
continuously monitored and the heating effect
is calculated over time. A motor overload trip
will not automatically stop the drive, but is an
important alarm signal to elevator car controller
to help prevent equipment damage.
Armature Voltage Feedback
DSPR
This is a temporary ‘construction’ or trial mode
for proving out direction orientation of the
motor and operation of the encoder. Motor
speed regulation is controlled by armature
voltage feedback with IR compensation.
Precise speed regulation is not possible.
Operation above base speed of the motor is
not possible since the field weakening is
inhibited. However, it is still possible to
monitor the feedback from the encoder
although it is not used for speed regulation.
Successful operation in this mode may require
reduced gain settings. This is selectable by
setting SPD REG TYPE (C1) to CEMF REG.
While the drive is idle with Stand-By Current
being applied to the motor field, a second timer
for Drive Stand-by Power Reduction (DSPR)
will be running. When/If the DPSR timer
times-out, motor field current will turn
completely Off and the main 3-phase power to
the drive will be removed. This helps save
electrical energy during long periods of nonuse. Recovery of this condition will be
automatic upon the receipt of the next “FullField” or “Run” command. At that time,
recovery from a DSPR power OFF condition
may take several seconds. DSPR TIME can
be set in the Drive A1 Submenu.
26
Quattro DC Drive Operation and Feature Overview
Status Indicator Lights
MONITOR / Adjust / Set-up Parameters:
Five status indicator lamps are provided on the
front panel of the drive.
The values of all adjustments and set up
parameters are stored locally in non-volatile
drive memory. Monitoring of live data status
and modification of parameter values can be
accomplished by sequences over the serial
link or the Magnetek Operator. They can both
be attached at the same time to modify
parameters or monitor drive operation.
Detailed descriptions of all adjustments are
located in later sections of this manual.
READY – (GRN) Power is applied to the drive,
there are no drive Faults and drive is
ready to Run when requested. The Run
light will blink slowly when it is in DSPR
(Drive Standby Power Reduction) Mode
or not boosting, but three-phase power is
applied.
RUN – (GRN) Indicates that the motor
contactor is closed and the drive is
following applied references operating to
control torque and speed
PROGRAM INVALID – (RED) There is no
valid program loaded.
FAULT – (Red) A drive Fault exists that is
preventing the drive from operating
CURRENT LIMIT – (YEL) Motor current is
being limited
READY
RUN
PROGRAM INVALID
FAULT
CURRENT LIMIT
27
Quattro DC Parameters
Parameters
Parameter Introduction
This section describes the parameter menu
structure of the Magnetek Operator, how to
navigate this menu structure, and a detailed
description of each parameter.
DISPLAY 1 D0
D1 ELEVATOR DATA
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Parameters are grouped under six major
menus:






Menus
ADJUST A0
CONFIGURE C0
UTILITY U0
FAULTS F0
DISPLAY 1 D0
DISPLAY 2 D0
Each menu has a number of sub-menus.
Following is a listing of the menus:
 ADJUST A0
 CONFIGURE C0
 UTILITY U0
 FAULTS F0
 DISPLAY 1 D0
 DISPLAY 2 D0
When the SUB-MENU LED is off, the currently
selected menu is shown on the top line of the
Digital Operator display and the currently
selected sub-menu is shown on the bottom line
of the Digital Operator display.
Display 1 D0 Adjust A0
 Elevator
Data D1
 MS Power
Data D2
 LS Power
Data D3
 Drive A1
 S-Curves A2

MultiStep Ref
A3

MS Pwr
Convert A4
 LS Pwr
Convert A5

Configure C0
Utility U0
Faults F0
Display 2 D0
 User
Switches C1
 Password
U1
 Active
Faults F1

Elevator
Data D1
 Logic Inputs
C2
 Hidden
Items U2
 Fault
History F2

MS Power
Data D2
 Logic
Outputs C3
 Units U3
 Analog
Outputs C4
Motor A6
 Ovrspeed
Test U4
 Restore
Dflts U5
 MS Info U6
 LS Info U7
 Hex Monitor
U8
Menu/Sub-Menu Tree
28
 LS Power
Data D3
Quattro DC Parameters
Menu Navigation
The digital operator keys operate on three
levels, the menu level, the sub-menu level and
the entry level. At the menu level, they
function to navigate between menus or submenus. At the sub-menu level, they navigate
between sub-menus or menu items. At the
entry level, they are used to adjust values or
select options. Six (6) keys are used for this
navigation; they are shown below:
ADJUST A0
DRIVE
A1
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Each menu will remember the last accessed
sub-menu. The left and right arrow keys will
navigate between these last active sub-menus.
This remembrance of last active sub-menu is
volatile and will be lost at power down.
When any sub-menu is displayed, pressing the
“ENTER” key will place the operator in the submenu level.
Up Arrow key
Left Arrow
Down Arrow key
ESCAPE key
Right Arrow
ENTER key
Navigation at the Sub-menu Level
When in the sub-menu level, the SUB-MENU
LED on the digital operator is lit. At the submenu level, the positioning keys work slightly
different than they did at the menu level. The
up and down arrow keys now select separate
items in the sub-menu.
Digital Operator Keys
How these keys operate is dependent on the
“level” (i.e. menu, sub-menu or entry level.) In
general, the “ENTER” and “ESCAPE” keys
control the level. That is the ENTER key is
used to move to a lower level and the
ESCAPE key is used to move to a higher level.
The arrow keys control movement. The up and
down arrow keys control vertical position and
the left and right arrow keys control horizontal
position.
CONTRACT CAR SPD
A1 0400.0 fpm
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
At any time pressing the “ESCAPE” key will
return to the menu level. Upon exiting a submenu via the “ESCAPE” key, the last item
number is “remembered”. The next time this
sub-menu is entered, it is entered at the
“remembered” item number.
This feature can be used to obtain quick
access to two monitor values. Two menus one
labeled Display 1 D0 and one labeled Display
2 D0 have the same display items. One item
can be selected one under the Display 1 menu
and another under the Display 2 menu. The
left and right arrow keys can then be used to
move back and forth between these two
display items. Remember, that the
“remembering” of sub-menus and sub-menu
items is volatile and is lost at power-down.
Navigation at the Menu Level
At the menu level, the up and down arrow keys
cause the display to show the sub-menus.
The side arrow keys cause the display to
select which menu is active. When the end of
a menu is reached (either up, down, left or
right), pressing the same key will cause a wrap
around.
29
Quattro DC Parameters
Hidden Parameters
There are two types of parameters: standard
and hidden. Standard parameters are
available at all times. Hidden parameters are
for more advanced functions and are available
only if activated. Activation of the hidden
parameters is accomplished by setting of a
utility parameter, HIDDEN ITEMS U2.
Navigation at the Entry Level
When in the entry level, the DATA ENT LED
on the digital operator is lit. At the entry level,
the function of keys are redefined. The
“ESCAPE” key remains as the key used to
move back to the sub-menu level. The left and
right arrow keys are used as cursor positioning
keys and the up and down arrow keys are
used as increment and decrement keys.
CONTRACT CAR SPD
A1 0400.0 fpm
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
30
Quattro DC Parameters
Parameter Tree
Display D0
 Elevator Data D1
 Speed Command
 Speed Reference
 Speed Feedback
 Motor Speed
 Speed Error
 Pre-Torque Ref
 Pre-Torq Last
 Ext-Torque Cmd
 Spd Reg Torq Cmd
 Tach Rate Cmd
 Aux Torque Cmd
 Est Inertia
 Rx Com Status
 Rx Error Count
 Logic Outputs
 Logic Inputs
 Rx Logic Input
 MS Power Data D2





















Armature Current
Field Current
Armature Voltage
MS Bus Voltage
Motor Mode
Torque Ref
Est Spd Fdbk
Encoder Speed
Analog Addess2
Analog Addess3
Drive Overload
DS Module Temp
LS Module Temp
Highest Temp
Field IGBT Temp
Armature Cur Err
Auto Meas Arm L
Auto Meas IRDrop
Auto Meas Arm R
Auto Field Res
Auto Field TC
 LS Power Data D3













LS Pwr Input
DC Bus Volts
DC Bus Volts Ref
LS Overload
LS Input Current
LS D Axis I
LS Q Axis I
LS D Axis V
LS Q Axis V
Input Hz
Input Vab
Input Vca
LS Module Temp
Adjust A0
 Drive A1
 Contract Car Spd
 Contract Mtr Spd
 Response
 Inertia
 Inner Loop Xover
 Current Limit
 Gain Reduce Mult
 Gain Chng Level
 Tach Filter BW
 Tach Rate Gain
 Spd Phase Margin
 Ramped Stop Time
 Contact Flt Time
 Brake Pick Time
 Brake Hold Time
 Overspeed Level
 Overspeed Time
 Overspeed Mult
 Encoder Pulses



















Enc Ratio Mult
Spd Dev Lo Level
Spd Dev Time
Spd Dev Hi Level
Spd Command Bias
Spd Command Mult
Ext Torque Bias
Ext Torque Mult
Pre Torque Time
Zero Speed Level
Zero Speed Time
Up/Dwn Threshold
Ana 1 Out Offset
Ana 2 Out Offset
Ana 1 Out Gain
Ana 2 Out Gain
Fault Reset Delay
Flt Resets/Hour
Up To Spd. Level



















Run Delay Timer
AB Zero Spd Level
AB Off Delay
Contactor DO Dly
Trq Lim Msg Dly
ARB Mode
ARB Bandwidth
ARB Damping
ARB Speed Threshold
Notch Filter Frq
Notch Filt Depth
Stndby Fld Time
DSPR Time
FullFldFltTime
FullFldFltTime
SER2 INSP SPD
SER2 RS CRP SPD
SER2 RES CRP TIME
SER2 FLT TOL
 S-Curves A2
 Accel Rate 0
 Decel Rate 0
 Accel Jerk In 0
 Accel Jerk Out 0
 Decel Jerk In 0
 Decel Jerk Out 0
 Accel Rate 1
 Decel Rate 1








Accel Jerk In 1
Accel Jerk Out 1
Decel Jerk In 1
Decel Jerk Out 1
Accel Rate 2
Decel Rate 2
Accel Jerk In 2
Accel Jerk Out 2








Decel Jerk In 2
Decel Jerk Out 2
Accel Rate 3
Decel Rate 3
Accel Jerk In 3
Accel Jerk Out 3
Decel Jerk In 3
Decel Jerk Out 3
 Multistep Ref A3
 Speed Command 1
 Speed Command 2
 Speed Command 3
 Speed Command 4
 Speed Command 5





Speed Command 6
Speed Command 7
Speed Command 8
Speed Command 9
Speed Command 10





Speed Command 11
Speed Command 12
Speed Command 13
Speed Command 14
Speed Command 15




Gain Selection
Gain Bandwidth A
Gain Bandwidth F
Spd Modefilt BW




PWM Frequency
UV Alarm Level
UV Fault Level
Fld Carrier Frq
 LS Pwr Convert A5
 Id Reg Prop Gain
 Id Reg Intgrl Gain
 Iq Reg Prop Gain
 Iq Reg Intgrl Gain
 DC Bus Reg P Gain





DC Bus Reg I Gain
Input L-L Volts
Initial L Freq
DC Bus V Boost
SW Bus OV Level





Bus Vref Source
PLL Filter Fc
Pole Filter
Pre Chge Thresh
LS PWM Frequency
 Motor A6
 Motor ID
 Rated Motor Curr
 Armature Voltage
 Full Fld Current
 Weak Fld Current
 Standby Field






Flux Confirm Lev
Armature IR Drop
Tach Volt Sense
Tach Speed Sense
Ovld Start Level
Ovld Time Out





Save Meas Arm L
Save IR Drop
Save Meas Arm R
Save Field Res
Save Field Tc
 MS Pwr Convert A4
 Arm Inductance
 Arm Resistance
 Motor Field Res
 Motor Field Tc
 AutoTune Mtr
31
Quattro DC Parameters
Configure C0
Utility U0
 User Switches C1
 Spd Command Src
 Run Command Src
 Field Ena Source
 Hi/Lo Gain Src
 Speed Reg Type
 Motor Rotation
 Encoder Connect
 Spd Ref Release
 Cont Confirm Src
 Tach Filter
 PreTorque Source
 PreTorque Latch
 Ptorq Latch Clck
 Fault Reset Src
 Overspd Test Src
 Brake Pick Scr
















Brake Pick Cnfm
Brake Hold Src
Ramped Stop Sel
Ramp Down En Src
Brk Pick Flt Ena
Brk Hold Flt Ena
Ext Torq Cmd Src
Dir Confirm
S-curve Abort
Priority Message
Stopping Mode
Auto Stop
DSPR Enable
ARB Select
Serial Mode
SER2 FLT mode
 Logic Inputs C2
 N.C. Inputs
 Logic Input 1 TB1-1
 Logic Input 2 TB1-2
 Logic Input 3 TB1-3
 Logic Input 4 TB1-4





Logic Input 5 TB1-5
Logic Input 6 TB1-6
Logic Input 7 TB1-7
Logic Input 8 TB1-8
Logic Input 9 TB1-9
 Logic Outputs C3
 Logic Output 1 TB1-25
 Logic Output 2 TB1-26
 Logic Output 3 TB1-27
 Logic Output 4 TB1-28
 Logic Output 5 TB1-29
 Logic Output 6 TB1-30





Logic Output 7 TB1-31
SS Relay 1 TB1-21/22
SS Relay 2 TB1-23/24
Relay Coil 1 TB2-1/3/5
Relay Coil 2 TB2-8/10/12
 Analog Outputs C4
 Analog Output 1 TB1-12
 Password U1
 Enter Password
 New Password
 Password Lockout
 Hidden Items U2
 Hidden Items Enable
 Units U3
 Units Selection
 Ovrspeed Test U4
 Overspeed Test?
 Restore Dflts U5
 Restore Motor Defaults
 Restore Drive Defaults
 Restore Utility Defaults
 Analog Output 2 TB1-13
 MS Info U6
 MS Type
 MS Platform
 Field Module
 MS Code Version
 MS S/W Date
 MS S/W Time
 MS PIB Module
 MS FPGA Rev
 MS Cube ID
 LS Info U7
 LS Type
 LS Code Version
 LS S/W Date
 LS S/W Time
 LS FPGA Rev
 LS Cube ID
 Hex Monitor1 U8
 Addr1
 Addr2&
 Addr3&
32
Faults F0
 Active Faults F1
 Display Active Faults
 Reset Active Faults
 Fault History F2
 Display Fault History
 Clear Fault History
 Display Fault Counters
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Adjust A0 menu
Drive A1 submenu
Parameter
Description
CONTRACT
CAR SPD
(Contract Car Speed) Adjusts the
elevator contract speed in feet per minute
(fpm) or meters per second (m/s).
Units
Default
Range
fpm
100.0
0.0 – 1500.0
m/s
2.000
0.000 – 8.000
50.0
(Contract Motor Speed) Sets motor rpm
when commanded to run at elevator
CONTRACT
contract speed. The speed regulator
rpm
MTR SPD
actually regulates RPM x Encoder PPR
pulses per second. Trim this value to fine
tune actual elevator speed.
(Response) Sets the sensitivity of the
drive’s speed regulator in terms of the
speed regulator bandwidth in radians.
The responsiveness of the drive as it
RESPONSE
follows the speed reference will increase rad/sec
as this number increases. If the number
is too large, the motor current and speed
will be jittery. If this number is too small,
the motor will be sluggish.
(Per Unit System Inertia) This parameter
is the inertia/torque ratio as seen by the
drive. It affects internal gain of the speed
INERTIA
sec
regulator. This time in seconds is the
time it would take the motor to accelerate
a load-balanced elevator to contract
speed at rated torque.
(Inner Loop Crossover) This parameter
is used as a stiffness factor. Higher
settings make the drive more responsive
to load changes and can help minimize
rollback. Because of the amount of
INNER LOOP
responsiveness due to a high setting, the
rad/sec
XOVER
drive is more sensitive to speed
disturbances and this parameter can
affect ride quality. Note: this parameter is
only used when SPEED REG TYPE (C1)
= ELEV SPD REG. See SPD PHASE
MARGIN (A1) if using PI REG.
(Armature Current Limit) This parameter
CURRENT LIMIT sets armature current limit for DC motor
%
applications.
(Gain Reduce Multiplier) This parameter
is the percent of ‘response’ the speed
regulator should use in the ‘low gain’
GAIN REDUCE
mode. This value reduces the
%
MULT
RESPONSE value when the drive is in
‘low gain’ mode. (i.e. setting this
parameter to 100% equals no reduction
in gain in the ‘low gain’ mode)
(Gain Change Level) When the HI/LO
GAIN SRC in submenu C1 is set to
internal, the drive will control the high/low
gain switch. This parameter sets the
GAIN CHNG
%
speed reference level, above which, the
LEVEL
drive is in ‘low gain’ mode. Units in
percent of rated speed.
For more information, see GAIN CHNG
LEVEL on page 40.
33
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
30.0 – 3000.0
N
Y
5.0
1.0 – 20.0
N
N
2.00
0.25 – 10.00
N
N
2.0
0.1 – 20.0
N
N
250.0
0.0 – 275.0
N
N
100
10 – 100
Y
N
100.0
0.0 – 100.0
Y
N
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
TACH FILTER
BW
TACH RATE
GAIN
SPD PHASE
MARGIN
RAMPED STOP
TIME
CONTACT FLT
TIME
BRAKE PICK
TIME
Description
Units
(Tach Filter Bandwidth) This parameter
sets the upper limit for a low pass filter for
the tachometer / encoder feedback
rad/sec
signal. Setting this value too low may
cause irregular performance. TACH
FILTER (C1) must be ON for this
parameter to have effect.
(Tach Rate Gain) Used to help reduce
the effects of rope resonance or rope
none
stretch. It should be adjusted only after
the INERTIA and RESPONSE have been
set correctly.
(Speed Phase Margin) This parameter
sets the phase margin of the speed
regulator assuming a pure inertial load.
degs
This parameter is only in affect if SPEED
REG TYPE (C1) is set to PI REG. See
INNER LOOP XOVER (A1) if using ELEV
SPD REG.
(Ramped Stop Time) This parameter is
used only by the torque ramp down
function during a stop and sets the time
to decrease motor torque from rated
torque to zero. After the elevator comes
to a halt at a landing the brake is applied
and the drive is told to turn off. However,
components of the mechanical brake
must ‘set’ ever so slightly in order to
generate enough torque to hold the car.
This small movement can cause a
significant ‘bump’ if the transfer of torque
occurs too quickly. This effect is
essentially eliminated by the Torque
sec
Ramp Down function.
The Ramped Stop Select function is
enabled at (RAMPED STOP SEL(C1)).
The Ramped Stop Time Parameter
determines the rate of motor torque
decay with ramped stop enabled.
RAMPED STOP TIME(A1) determines
the amount of time it would take for the
drive to ramp from rated torque to zero
torque. The actual time for torque decay
to occur on a typical stop will depend on
the actual amount of torque required to
hold the car.
(Contactor Fault Time) Determines
allowable time for motor contactor
sec
feedback to be out of sync with
commanded state before a CONTACTOR
FLT occurs.
(Brake Pick Time) If BRAKE PICK
CNFM is set to INTERNAL TIME this
parameter sets the internal time the drive
waits until it assumes the brake has been
sec
picked. If BRAKE PICK CNFM is set to
EXTERNAL TB, this parameter sets the
time the drive waits until it receives a
brake pick confirmation or a BRK PICK
FLT will be declared.
34
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Default
Range
100
1 – 100
Y
N
0.0
0.0 – 30.0
Y
N
80
45 – 90
Y
N
0.20
0.00 – 2.50
Y
N
0.50
0.10 – 5.00
Y
N
1.00
0.00 – 5.00
Y
N
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
BRAKE HOLD
TIME
OVERSPEED
LEVEL
OVERSPEED
TIME
OVERSPEED
MULT
ENCODER
PULSES
Description
Units
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Default
Range
0.50
0.00 – 5.00
Y
N
115.0
90.0 – 150.0
Y
N
0.10
0.00 – 9.99
Y
N
125.0
100.0 – 150.0
Y
N
5000
600 – 20000
N
Y
none
1.000
0.001 – 32.000
N
Y
%
10.0
0.1 – 20.0
Y
N
(Brake Hold Time) Determines the time
the drive will wait until a BRK HOLD FLT
sec
is declared if a logic input is set to MECH
BRK HOLD
(Over speed Level) Sets the percentage
of rated speed the drive uses (in
conjunction with OVERSPEED TIME,
%
below) to determine when an
OVERSPEED fault occurs. Units in
percent of contract speed
(Over speed Time) Sets the time that the
drive can be at or above the
sec
OVERSPEED LEVEL (A1), before the
drive declares an OVERSPEED FLT.
(Over Speed Multiplier) Sets the
percentage of CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) %
for the OVERSPEED TEST (U4).
(Encoder Pulses per Revolution, PPR)
This parameter sets the pulses per
revolution (per channel) the drive
receives from the encoder. Set this value
to agree with the pulses per revolution on
the encoder nameplate if the tachometer
is directly coupled to the motor shaft. If
tachometer connected to rider roll to
measure linear velocity, then this should
PPR
be a calculated value equal to the counts
expected from the encoder when the
motor makes exactly one revolution.
Please note, ENC RATIO MULT and
ENCODER PULSES must satisfy:
 enc 

 encoder  
 pulses    ratio 32,700

  mult 


ENC RATIO
MULT
(Encoder to Motor Ratio Multiplier) This
parameter is the ratio of encoder RPM to
motor RPM. If friction wheel is utilized for
the encoder, the motor sheave diameter
divided by the tach wheel diameter
should be entered here. This value will
be multiplied to the encoder pulses per
revolution within the drive to obtain
proper motor rpm speed feedback
information for regulation. If the encoder
is directly coupled to the motor shaft, this
parameter should be set to 1.000.
Please note, ENC RATIO MULT and
ENCODER PULSES must satisfy:
 enc 

 encoder  

   ratio 32,700
 pulses   mult 


SPD DEV LO
LEVEL
(Speed Deviation Lo Level) Range
around the speed reference for speed
deviation low logic output. Units are in
percent of contract speed. See SPD
DEV LO LEVEL and SPD DEV HI LEVEL
on page 41.
35
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
(Speed Deviation Time) This parameter
defines the time the speed feedback
needs to be in the range around the
SPD DEV TIME
speed reference defined by SPD DEV LO
LEVEL (A1) before the Speed Deviation
Low logic output is true.
(Speed Deviation High Level) Level for
declaring speed deviation alarm. Units
SPD DEV HI
are in percent of contract speed. See
LEVEL
SPD DEV LO LEVEL and SPD DEV HI
LEVEL on page 41.
(Speed Command Bias) This parameter
subtracts an effective voltage to the
SPD COMMAND actual analog speed command voltage
signal.
BIAS
 analog
 channel#1

 input
 voltage

SPD
SPD

 COMMAND   COMMAND

BIAS
MULT


EXT TORQUE
BIAS


COMMAND
MULT

EXT 
EXT
 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT



EXT 
EXT
 TORQUE   TORQUE
BIAS 
MULT


sec
0.50
0.00 – 9.99
Y
N
%
10.0
0.0 – 99.9
Y
N
volts
0.00
-6.00 – +6.00
Y
Y
none
1.00
0.90 – 5.00
Y
Y
volts
0.00
-6.00 – 6.00
Y
Y
none
1.00
-10.00 – 10.00
Y
Y
sec
0.00
0.00 – 10.00
N
Y
signal
drive
software
uses
(External Torque Multiplier) This
parameter scales the analog pretorque /
torque command (channel 2). If this
function is set to 1.00, a 10V signal will
call for 100% torque. Note: Drive
automatically limits current at 300% or
the value in CURRENT LIMIT (A1). For
more information, see Analog Inputs on
page 19 and Pre-Torque / Torque Feed
Forward on page 25.
 analog
 channel#2

 input
 voltage
PRE TORQUE
TIME
COMMAND 

BIAS

Range
drive
software
uses
(External Torque Bias) This parameter
subtracts an effective voltage to the
actual analog pre torque / torque
command (channel 2) voltage signal.
Note: Drive automatically limits current at
300% or the value in CURRENT LIMIT
(A1). For more information, see Analog
Inputs on page 19 and Pre-Torque /
Torque Feed Forward on page 25.
 analog
 channel#2

 input
 voltage
EXT TORQUE
MULT

Default
signal
drive
software
uses
(Speed Command Multiplier) This
parameter scales the analog speed
SPD COMMAND command.
MULT
 analog

signal
SPD
SPD


 channel#1
 input
 voltage
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
signal
drive
software
uses
(Pre Torque Time)
Time to ramp torque from zero to pretorque value. When set to zero, PreTorque will be applied immediately. This
helps eliminate the ‘bump’ felt upon
starting caused by the torque being
immediately set to rated pre-torque.
Setting this parameter to zero will disable
the Pre Torque Ramp Up function. With
a non-zero setting for Pre Torque Time,
the torque reference will be linearly
ramped from zero to the value given
through the Analog Input Channel or the
serial channel.
36
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
ZERO SPEED
LEVEL
ZERO SPEED
TIME
UP/DWN
THRESHOLD
ANA 1 OUT
OFFSET
Description
(Zero Speed Level) This parameter sets
the threshold for zero speed detection.
This is only used to generate the zero
speed logic output.
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled,
this parameter also sets the threshold for
the termination of the test to confirm the
polarity of the analog speed command.
Unites in percent of contract speed
(Zero Speed Time) This parameter sets
the time at which the drive is measured to
be at or below the ZERO SPEED LEVEL
(A1) before zero speed logic output is
true.
(Directional Threshold) This parameter
sets the threshold for the direction sense
logic outputs. If speed feedback does not
reach this level, the drive will not detect a
directional change. This is only used to
generate the direction sense logic outputs
(car going up and car going down). Units
in percent of contract speed.
(Digital to Analog #1 Output Offset)
Offset for scaling Analog Output Channel
#1.
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive

software OUT
  OUT 


GAIN
 creates OFFSET 


analog
channel
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
%
1.00
0.00 – 99.99
Y
Y
sec
0.10
0.00 – 9.99
Y
Y
%
1.00
0.00 – 9.99
Y
Y
%
0.0
-99.9 – 99.9
Y
N
%
0.0
-99.9 – 99.9
Y
N
none
1.0
0.0 – 10.0
Y
N
none
1.0
0.0 – 10.0
Y
N
sec
5
0 – 120
Y
N
faults
3
0 – 10
Y
N
output
voltage
(Digital to Analog #2 Output Offset) Offset
for scaling Analog Output Channel #2.
ANA 2 OUT
OFFSET
ANA 1 OUT
GAIN
ANA 2 OUT
GAIN
FLT RESET
DELAY
FLT RESETS /
HOUR
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive


OUT

OUT

software



OFFSET
GAIN
 creates



analog
channel
output
voltage
(Digital to Analog #1 Output Gain)
Adjusts the scaling for the Analog Output
Channel #1.
NOTE: value of 1.0 = 0 to 10VDC signal.
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive


OUT
software
  OUT 


GAIN
 creates OFFSET 


analog
channel
output
voltage
(Digital to Analog #2 Output Gain)
Adjusts the scaling for the Analog Output
Channel #2.
NOTE: value of 1.0 = 0 to 10VDC signal.
 signal



ANA
ANA
 drive


OUT

OUT

software



OFFSET
GAIN
 creates



analog
channel
output
voltage
(Fault Reset Delay) When the drive is
set for automatic fault reset, this is the
time before a fault is automatically reset.
(Fault Resets per Hour) When the drive
is set for automatic fault reset, this is the
number of faults allowed to be
automatically reset per hour.
37
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
UP TO SPD.
LEVEL
RUN DELAY
TIMER
Description
(Up to Speed Level) This parameter sets
the threshold for the up to speed logic
output. This is only used to generate the
up to speed logic output. Units in percent
of contract speed.
(Run Recognition Delay Timer) Allows
the user to delay the drive’s recognition of
the RUN signal therefore allow more time
for the motor contactor to set. This
parameter allows the user to delay the
drive’s recognition of the RUN signal
internal connection internal connection
READY TO RUN
FLUX CONFIRM
(logic output)
(logic output)
 software ready
 flux level 90%
 no faults
 drive boosting
Drive
RUN or
RUN UP or
RUN
DOWN
(logic
DRIVE
ENABLE
(logic
input)
AB ZERO SPD
LEV
AB OFF DELAY
CONTACTOR
DO DLY
TRQ LIM MSG
DLY
CONTACT
CFIRM
(logic input)
(if used)
Internal
Signals
Speed
Regulator
and
Reference
Release
Drive Internal
Signal
Run Confirm
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
%
90.00
0.00 –110.00
Y
N
sec
0.00
0.00 – 0.99
Y
Y
%
1.00
0.00 – 2.00
Y
Y
sec
0.00
0.00 – 9.99
Y
Y
sec
0.00
0.00 – 5.00
Y
Y
sec
0.50
0.00 – 10.00
Y
Y
Run recognition
delay
(Auto Brake Zero Speed Level) Sets the
speed point that will be considered as
zero speed for the auto brake function.
The units are % of contract speed.
In order to use the Auto Brake Function,
a logic output needs to be configured for
AUTO BRAKE (C3), the parameter SPD
COMMAND SRC(C1) = MULTI-STEP,
the parameter SPD REF RELEASE (C1)
= BRAKE PICKED, and the parameter
BRAKE PICK CFRM(C1) = EXTERNAL
TB1.
(Auto Brake Off Delay) Determines the
time after zero speed is reached (level
determined by the AB ZERO SPD LEV
(A1) parameter) that the Auto Brake logic
output goes false.
(Contactor Drop-Out Delay) When the
drive controls the motor contacts via
CLOSE CONTACT logic output, this
parameter allows the user to delay the
drive’s dropout of the motor contactor.
The delay time starts when the speed
regulator release signal goes false.
(Torque Limit Message Delay) This
parameter determines the amount of time
the drive is in torque limit before the “HIT
TORQUE LIMIT” alarm message is
displayed.
38
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Parameter
Description
Units
Default
Range
ARB MODE
Selects between 3 possible Anti-Rollback
operating modes.
"0" to disable all Anti-Rollback features.
Only E-Reg will be engaged
"1" to enable Anti-Rollback when the
drive is started.
"2" to enable Anti-Rollback when starting
the drive and when the velocity again
comes to a stop at the next landing.For
more information, see Anti-Rollback on
page 114.
none
0
0-2
Y
Y
ARB
BANDWIDTH
Determines the gain of the velocity and
position regulator when ARB is ON. This
is the unity gain crossover frequency in
Radians/sec. Increasing this setting will
cause the position loop to respond faster
with less accumulated position error.
For more information, see Anti-Rollback
on page 114.
RAD
6.00
1.00 – 15.00
Y
Y
ARB DAMPING
Adjusts damping of the position regulator
when ARB is ON. Increasing this setting
will cause a smoother but slower
recovery of position error. Reducing this
setting will let ARB recover a position
error more quickly and abruptly.
For more information, see Anti-Rollback
on page 114.
none
2.00
0.01 – 20.00
Y
Y
ARB SPEED
THRESHOLD
Determines the reference speed where
ARB will be turned OFF and E-Reg will
be engaged when the drive is started, if
ARB mode is set to 1 or 2. This setting
should be as low as possible to prevent
regulator transfer bumps when starting,
but it must be set high enough to remain
engaged during re-leveling or to ignore a
small analog zero reference offset when
using an external analog signal
reference. In percent of rated speed
For more information, see Anti-Rollback
on page 114.
%
0.00
0.00 – 10.00
Y
Y
Hz
20
5 – 60
Y
Y
%
0
0 – 100
Y
Y
sec
5
0 – 999
Y
Y
NOTCH FILTER
FRQ
NOTCH FILT
DEPTH
STNDBY FLD
TIME
(Notch Filter Frequency) Determines the
notch filter center frequency. For more
information, see NOTCH FILTER FRQ on
page 41.
(Notch Filter Depth) Determines notch
filter maximum attenuation.
Note: A filter depth setting of zero
(NOTCH FILT DEPTH (A1) = 0) removes
the filter.
(Standby Field Delay Time) Determines
the time the drive will continue to supply
Full Field current after stopping and
turning motor armature current control
OFF. Motor field current will drop to
standby amps after this time delay.
39
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
DSPR TIME
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
(Drive Standby Power Reduction Time)
Determines how long the drive will remain
energized with motor field current at
Standby amps before progressing to
complete drive shutdown and utility side
disconnection. Only used when DPSR
ENABLE (C1) is set to ENABLE
min
10
0 – 546
Y
Y
(Full Field Fault Time) Determines
the maximum time the drive can
remain at Full Field without actually
running. If logically held in that
FullFldFaultTime
condition for longer than the Full field
Time, a Fault will be declared to
prevent potential burnout of the
motor field.
min
1
0 - 99
Y
Y
SER RES CRP
TIME
Sec
180
0 - 200
N
Y
0.5
0 - 200
N
Y
30
0 - 100
N
Y
0.150
0 – 0.50
10
0 - 300
N
N
Y
Y
0.050
0 – 1.54
N
Y
SER2 FLT TOL
SER2 Insp spd
SER2 Insp spd
SER2 RS CRP
spd
SER2 RS CRP
spd
Maximum time to allow rescue operation
Maximum time to allow between
Sec
reception of packets in serial mode 2
Used to select speed during inspection
ft/min
mode
m/sec
Used to select speed during inspection
mode
ft/min
Used to select speed during rescue mode
m/sec
Used to select speed during rescue mode
Table 1: Drive A1 Submenu
Detailed descriptions
gain source parameter (HI/LO GAIN SRC) in
Configuration menu C0 allows for an external
or automatic internal gain switch selection.
HI/LO Gain
When HI/LO GAIN SRC (C1) is set to internal,
GAIN CHG LVL (A1) sets the speed reference
level that controls the Hi/Lo gain switch. The
velocity regulator will use normal ‘high gain’
when the reference speed is below this value,
or ‘low gain’ settings when the speed reference
is above this value.
On some elevators when the speed response
(gain) is set to high levels as required for good
velocity tracking during acceleration, the
resonant characteristics of the elevator ropes
can cause car vibration while running at steady
state speed. To reduce this problem, the
response (gain) of the speed regulator is
effectively reduced to a lower value so that the
resonant characteristics of the ropes are not
continuously excited. The High/Low gain
switch modifies the response of the speed
regulator via the gain reduce multiplier.
GAIN REDUCE MULT (A1) adjusts how much
gain reduction will occur at higher speeds.
High / low gain switching may be controlled
either externally or internally. The high / low
40
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
not properly tracking the speed reference and
is outside a defined range around the speed
reference (see Figure 15). The defined range
is determined by the Speed Deviation High
Level parameter
The high/low gain switch may be controlled by
either:
 a logic input
 the serial channel
 the gain change level parameter (GAIN CHNG
LEVEL), which defines a percentage of
contract speed
Quattro Parameter Settings
HI/LO GAIN SRC = internal
GAIN REDUCE MULT = 80%
GAIN CHNG LEVEL = 10 %
RESPONSE = 10.0 rad/sec
Speed Deviation High
(Speed Deviation Alarm)
Response of
Speed Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
Speed Deviation Low
Speed Reference
speed reference
100% contract speed
10%
contract
speed
0%
contract
speed
low gain
mode
Response of
Speed Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
10%
contract
speed
Speed Feedback
0%
contract
speed
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
Speed Deviation High
(Speed Deviation Alarm)
Figure 15: Speed Deviation Example
High / Low Gain Example
SPD DEV LO LEVEL and SPD DEV HI
LEVEL
(Speed Deviation Low / High Level)
These two functions are available to indicate
how the speed feedback is tracking the speed
reference.
 Speed Deviation Low – indicates that the
speed feedback is tracking the speed
reference within a defined range.
 Speed Deviation High – indicates that the
speed feedback is failing to properly track
the speed reference.
The Speed Deviation Low function has the
ability to set a configurable logic output. The
logic output will be true, when the speed
feedback is tracking the speed reference within
a defined range around the speed reference
for a defined period of time (see Figure 15).
The defined range is determined by the Speed
Deviation Low Level parameter (SPD DEV LO
LEVEL) and the defined time is determined by
the Speed Deviation Time parameter (SPD
DEV TIME).
The Speed Deviation High function
annunciates a Speed Deviation Alarm, and has
the ability to set a configurable logic output.
The alarm will be annunciated and the logic
output will be true, when the speed feedback is
41
Quattro DC Drive A1 Submenu
this would not be an issue if the notch
frequency were set at or above 10 Hz.
NOTCH FILTER FRQ
(Notch Filter Center Frequency)
This function helps alleviate the effects of rope
resonance. This filter affects the torque
command output of the speed regulator and
will filter out specific frequencies. By filtering a
specific frequency, the speed regulator will
avoid exciting a mechanical resonance if one
exists at that frequency.
There is attenuation across a range of
frequencies, not just at the set frequency, but
also to a lesser degree. The filter starts
attenuation at frequencies lower than the notch
frequency set point. When the notch
frequency is set to low values (less than 10
Hz), the filter can interfere with the desired
response of the drive. This can be exhibited
by minor increase in the rollback of the drive at
start and some deterioration in the ability of the
drive to track an s-curve reference. Generally,
Notch Filter Example settings:
NOTCH FILTER FRQ (A1) = 20Hz
NOTCH FILT DEPTH (A1) = 50% and 100%
0
-5
-10
Attenuation
-15
(dB)
-20
-25
-30
42
1
10
Frequency
(Hz)
100
Quattro DC Drive S-Curves A2
There are four S-curve patterns available in
the drive and each S-curve is customized by
six parameters:
Parameters for S-curve-0 (SC0):
 ACCEL RATE 0, DECEL RATE 0, ACCEL
JERK IN 0, ACCEL JERK OUT 0, DECEL
JERK IN 0, and DECEL JERK OUT 0
Parameters for S-curve-1 (SC1):
 ACCEL RATE 1, DECEL RATE 1, ACCEL
JERK IN 1, ACCEL JERK OUT 1, DECEL
JERK IN 1, and DECEL JERK OUT 1
Parameters for S-curve-2 (SC2):
 ACCEL RATE 2, DECEL RATE 2, ACCEL
JERK IN 2, ACCEL JERK OUT 2, DECEL
JERK IN 2, DECEL JERK OUT 2
Parameters for S-curve-3 (SC3):
 ACCEL RATE 3, DECEL RATE 3, ACCEL
JERK IN 3, ACCEL JERK OUT 3, DECEL
JERK IN 3, DECEL JERK OUT 3
S-Curves A2 submenu
The drive speed command is passed through
an internal S-curve in order to produce the
speed reference. In general, the S curve
function takes an arbitrary speed command
and generates a speed reference subject to
the conditions that the maximum accel, decel
and jerk rates not be exceeded. The speed
command is typically the target speed that the
reference is headed to.
If the user gives the drive a speed dictation,
either analog or serial, the S-Curve will act as
a slew rate limiter on the externally generated
speed dictation. For this purpose, set the jerk
rates associated with the S-Curve (see Table 2
for determining which s-curve is used) to zero
and the Accel Rate and Decel Rate to values
faster than the maximum expected rated
provided in the dictation signal.
S-Curve Pattern Selection
The default S-curve pattern is S-curve-0
(SC0). To make the other patterns available,
the user must assign S-CURVE SEL 0 and/or
S-CURVE SEL 1 as logic input(s). The logic
input(s) can then be used to select one of the
S-curve patterns, as follows:
Below shows the six parameters associated
with an S-Curve data set:
 Accel - Maximum allowed acceleration rate
(ft/s2 or m/s2)
 Decel - Maximum allowed deceleration rate
(ft/s2 or m/s2)
 Accel Jerk In - Maximum allowed change in
acceleration towards Accel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Accel Jerk Out - Maximum allowed change
in acceleration from Accel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Decel Jerk In - Maximum allowed change in
deceleration towards Decel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
 Decel Jerk Out - Maximum allowed change
in deceleration from Decel (ft/s3 or m/s3)
The S-curves are specified by four parameters:
acceleration rate (ft/s2 or m/s2 ), deceleration
rate (ft/s2 or m/s2), leveling jerk rate (ft/s3 or
m/s3 ), and jerk rate (ft/s3 or m/s3 ).
Logic Inputs
Assigned
S-curves
Available
None
SC0 only
SEL 0 only
SC0 or SC1
SEL 1 only
SC0 or SC2
SEL 0 & SEL 1
SC0, SC1,
SC2 or SC3
Table 2: S-Curve Availability
logic input
S-CURVE
SEL 1
SEL 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Since an adjustable jerk rate is helpful for
smooth landings, the jerk rates are split for
ease in elevator fine-tuning. The jerk rate
parameters specify: acceleration from the floor
(ACCEL JERK IN), jerk out of acceleration
(ACCEL JERK OUT), jerk into deceleration
(DECEL JERK IN), and the leveling into the
floor (DECEL JERK OUT).
S-curve
selected
SCO
SC1
SC2
SC3
Table 3: Selecting S-Curves
S-Curve
43
Quattro DC Drive S-Curves A2
Parameter
Description
ACCEL
RATE 0
Acceleration rate limit
DECEL
RATE 0
Deceleration rate limit
ACCEL
JERK IN 0
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
ACCEL
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 0 approaching contract elevator speed
DECEL
JERK IN 0
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
DECEL
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 0 slowing the elevator to leveling speed
ACCEL
RATE 1
Acceleration rate limit
DECEL
RATE 1
Deceleration rate limit
ACCEL
JERK IN 1
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
ACCEL
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 1 approaching contract elevator speed
DECEL
JERK IN 1
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
DECEL
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 1 slowing the elevator to leveling speed
ACCEL
RATE 2
Acceleration rate limit
DECEL
RATE 2
Deceleration rate limit
ACCEL
JERK IN 2
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
ACCEL
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 2 approaching contract elevator speed
DECEL
JERK IN 2
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
DECEL
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 2 slowing the elevator to leveling speed
ACCEL
RATE 3
Acceleration rate limit
DECEL
RATE 3
Deceleration rate limit
ACCEL
JERK IN 3
Rate of increase of acceleration, up to ACCEL
RATE, when increasing elevator speed
ACCEL
Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 3 approaching contract elevator speed
DECEL
JERK IN 3
Rate of increase of deceleration, up to DECEL
RATE, when decreasing elevator speed
DECEL
Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero when
JERK OUT 3 slowing the elevator to leveling speed
Units
Default
Range
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s2
m/s2
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
ft/s3
m/s3
7.99
2.000
7.99
2.000
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0.0
0.00
7.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
3.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
3.00
0.090
3.00
0.090
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
8.0
2.40
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.00 – 7.99
0.000 – 3.999
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
0.0 – 29.9
0.00 – 9.99
Table 4: S-Curves A2 Submenu
44
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Quattro DC Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
Multistep Ref A3 submenu
The multi-step speed reference function is one
possible way for the drive to accept speed
command. To use this function, the user can
enter up to fifteen speed commands (CMD1 –
CMD15) and assign four logic inputs as speed
command selections.
An example of the use of the multi-step
command is as follows:
 All speed commands are positive.
 CMD0 specifies zero speed.
 CMD1 specifies leveling speed.
 CMD2 specifies inspection speed.
 CMD3 specifies an overspeed limit.
 CMD4 – CMD15 specify different top
speeds depending on number of floors in
the run.
Note: CMD0 is reserved for zero speed,
therefore is not accessible to the user for
programming.
During operation, the user will encode a binary
signal on the four logic inputs that determines
which speed command the software should
use. The user need not use all four speed
command selection bits; if no logic input is
specified for one of the selection bits, that bit is
always zero. For instance, if no logic input is
specified for the most significant bit (B3), that
bit will be zero and the user can select from
CMD0 - CMD7.
For typical use, the user will have all speed
commands to be positive, in which case logic
inputs (UP/DWN or RUNUP & RUNDOWN)
must also be specified to determine up or
down direction. It is possible for the user to
specify both positive and negative values for
CMD1 - CMD15, in which case logic input
bit(s) are not needed.
IMPORTANT
Since these speed commands are selected
with external contacts, a new command
selection must be present for 50ms before it is
recognized.
B3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
logic input
STEP REF
B2
B1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
B0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
multi-step
speed
command
CMD0
CMD1
CMD2
CMD3
CMD4
CMD5
CMD6
CMD7
CMD8
CMD9
CMD10
CMD11
CMD12
CMD13
CMD14
CMD15
Multi-step Selection
45
Quattro DC Multistep Ref A3 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
Default
Range
SPEED COMMAND 1
Multi-step speed
command #1
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 2
Multi-step speed
command #2
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 3
Multi-step speed
command #3
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 4
Multi-step speed
command #4
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 5
Multi-step speed
command #5
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 6
Multi-step speed
command #6
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 7
Multi-step speed
command #7
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 8
Multi-step speed
command #8
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 9
Multi-step speed
command #9
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 10
Multi-step speed
command #10
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 11
Multi-step speed
command #11
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 12
Multi-step speed
command #12
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 13
Multi-step speed
command #13
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 14
Multi-step speed
command #14
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
SPEED COMMAND 15
Multi-step speed
command #15
ft/min
0.0
-3000.0 – +3000.0
m/sec
0.000
-16.000 – +16.000
Table 5: Multi-Step Ref A3 Submenu
46
Hidden
Item
Run
lockout
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
Quattro DC MS Pwr Cnvrt A4 Submenu
Motor Side Power Convert A4 submenu
Parameter
ARM
INDUCTANCE
ARM
RESISTANCE
MOTOR FIELD
RES
MOTOR FIELD
TC
AUTO TUNE
MOTOR
GAIN
SELECTION
Description
(Armature Circuit Inductance) Affects
tuning of the armature current regulator.
Load this parameter with known or
measured value. Only used if GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to Manual.
(Armature Circuit Resistance) Affects
tuning of the armature current regulator.
Load this parameter with known or
measured value. Only used if GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to Manual.
(Motor Field Resistance) Motor Field
Resistance affects the tuning of the field
current regulator. This parameter is
used only if GAIN SELECTION (A4) is
set to MANUAL.
(Motor Field Time Constant) Motor Field
Time Constant affects the tuning of the
field current regulator. This parameter is
used only if GAIN SELECTION (A4) is
set to MANUAL.
(Auto Tune Motor) Begins the procedure
to calculate motor parameters. See
Auto Tune Procedure on page 111.
(Gain Selection) If set to MANUAL, the
armature current regulator uses the
values in ARM RESISTANCE (A4),
ARM INDUCTANCE (A4), MOTOR
FIELD RES (A4), and MOTOR FIELD
TC (A4).
If set to USE SELF TUNE, the armature
current regulator gains are set using
AUTO MEAS ARM L(D2), AUTO MEAS
IR DROP (D2), AUTO MEAS ARM R
(D2), AUTO FIELD RES (D2), and
AUTO FIELD TC (D2).
If set to USE SAVED PAR, the
armature regulator gains are set using
SAVE MEAS ARM L (A6), SAVE IR
DROP (A6), SAVE MEAS ARM R (A6),
SAVE FIELD RES (A6), and SAVE
FIELD TC (A6).
If the D2 submenu contains null
values and USE SELF TUNE is
selected, GAIN SELECTION (A4) will
revert back to MANUAL.
If the SAVE MEAS parameters in the
A6 submenu contain null values and
USE SAVED PAR is selected, GAIN
SELECTION (A4) will revert back to
MANUAL.
47
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
mH
15.00
0.01 – 327.67
Y
N
ohm
0.5000
0.0001 – 2.9999
Y
N
ohm
9.0
0.0 – 3276.7
Y
N
sec
0.607
0.000 – 32.767
Y
N
none
-
Start Auto
Tune?
N
Y
N
N
none
 Manual
MANUA  Use saved par
L
Use self tune
Quattro DC MS Pwr Cnvrt A4 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
(Gain Bandwidth Armature) If GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to MANUAL,
this parameter is used to convert ARM
RESISTANCE (A4) and ARM
INDUCTANCE (A4) into the integral and
proportional gains used by the current
regulator.
If GAIN SELECTION is set to USE
GAIN
SELF TUNE, this parameter is used to
rad/ sec
BANDWIDTH A convert AUTO MEAS ARM R (D2) and
AUTO MEAS ARM L (D2) into the
integral and proportional gains used by
the current regulator. The higher the
setting, the more faithfully the regulator
will duplicate its input command,
however, too high of a bandwidth can
cause problems such as a rough ride as
the drive is more responsive.
(Gain Bandwidth Field) If GAIN
SELECTION is set to AUTO-TUNE, this
parameter is used to calculate AUTO
FIELD RES (D2) and AUTO FIELD TC
(D2) into the integral and proportional
gains used by the field regulator. The
higher the setting, the more faithfully the
GAIN
rad/sec
BANDWIDTH F regulator will duplicate its input
command, however, too high of a
bandwidth can cause problems such as
a rough ride as the drive is more
responsive.
This parameter is not used when GAIN
SELECTION (A4) = MANUAL.
(Speed Mode Filter Bandwidth) This
parameter sets the frequency of an
SPD MODEFILT encoder filter that affects PWM control
at very low motor torque. Care must be
BW
taken when using this parameter as an
inappropriate value may cause speed
instability.
(PWM Frequency) This parameter sets
PWM
the PWM or ‘carrier’ frequency of the
FREQUENCY
motor armature portion of the drive.
(Undervoltage Alarm Level) This
UV-ALARM
parameter sets the level at which an
LEVEL
under voltage alarm will be declared.
Units in percent of L-L voltage.
(Undervoltage Fault Level) This
UV FAULT
parameter sets the level at which an
LEVEL
under voltage fault will occur. Units in
percent of L-L voltage.
(Field Carrier Frequency) Allows
modification of PWM frequency to help
eliminate acoustic noise. If the Low
FLD CARRIER
Voltage Field Module is used, this
FRQ
parameter has no effect. With the Low
Voltage Field Module, the Field Carrier
Frequency is fixed at 40 kHz.
Default
500
Range
 100 – 2000
N
N
5
1 – 40
N
N
rad/sec
100
5 – 110
N
N
kHz
6.0
2.5 – 16.0
N
N
%
90
80 – 99
Y
N
%
80
50 – 99
Y
N
Y
N
HiVolt
Fld Mod HiVolt Fld Mod
3
3 – 10
kHz
LoVolt LoVolt Fld Mod
Fld Mod
40
40
Table 6: Motor Side Power Convert A4 Submenu
48
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Quattro DC LS Pwr Cnvrt A5 Submenu
Line Side Power Converter A5 submenu
NOTE: The only parameter that should ever need to be adjusted is INPUT L-L VOLTS. Other
parameters are for Magnetek Engineering use only.
Parameter
Description
Proportional gain for out-ofphase current regulator
Id REG INTEGRAL
Integral gain for out-of-phase
GAIN
current regulator
Proportional gain for in-phase
Iq REG PROP GAIN
current regulator
Iq REG INTEGRAL
Integral gain for in-phase
GAIN
current regulator
DC BUS REG P
Proportional gain for bus
GAIN
voltage regulator
Integral gain for bus voltage
DC BUS REG I GAIN
regulator
(Input Line to Line Voltage Input Voltage)
This parameter sets the nominal
INPUT L-L VOLTS
input voltage to the drive. Must
be set correctly to calibrate DC
bus voltage regulation and
precharge.
(Initial Line Frequency)
This parameter sets the initial
frequency of the input line
voltage. The defaulted value of
55Hz will work for most
INITIAL L FREQ
applications, however, when
line power is switched from
utility power to emergency
power, this value should be set
for the actual line power input
frequency.
(DC bus voltage reference)
Adjusts the DC bus voltage
boost above the peak of line
voltage.
Note: The bus must be higher
DC BUS V BOOST
than the Motor Armature
Voltage and higher than the line
voltage for proper line side
regulation of harmonics and
power factor.
(Software Bus Overvoltage
SW BUS OV LEVEL Level) DC bus software
Overvoltage trip point.
(Bus Voltage Reference
Source) Selects the bus
voltage boost reference.
 Track Line V uses the actual
line voltage for the bus
BUS VREF SOURCE
reference. Recommended
for systems with a stiff line.
 Trk Vin Param uses INPUT
L-L VOLTS (A5) for the bus
reference. Recommended to
systems with a soft line.
Id REG PROP GAIN
49
Units
Default
Range
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
none
0.30
0.00 – 9.99
N
N
none
10
0 – 999
N
N
none
0.30
0.00 – 9.99
N
N
none
40
0 – 999
N
N
none
3.00
0 – 9.99
N
N
none
40
0 – 999
N
N
volts
200
150 – 552
N
Y
Hz
55
50 – 60
N
Y
Vdc
30
15 – 75
N
N
Vdc
850
100 – 850
N
N
none
TRACK
LINE V
N
N
 Track Line V
 Trk Vin Param
Quattro DC LS Pwr Cnvrt A5 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
(Phase Locked Loop Filter
Frequency) Utility line Phase
PLL FILTER FC
Hz
Locked Loop filter corner
Frequency
(Pole Filter Setting)
This parameter adds a low pass
filter to the line side to help
alleviate nuisance noise issues.
This can be very useful in
situations where multiple drives
are located on the same line.
For one Quattro DC on the line,
2.2kHz setting is recommended.
Setting this parameter between
0.1 and 0.9 kHz, an 800 Hz 2nd
kHz
POLE FILTER
order lowpass filter, plus a 2nd
order notch filter is added to the
line side.
Setting this parameter to 1.0
kHz, an 800 Hz 2nd order
lowpass filter is added.
Setting this parameter between
1.1 and 3.0, a cascaded 2nd
order notch filter is added with
the center frequency the setting
of POLE FILTER.
(Pre-Charge Threshold) This
parameter determines the
allowable variance between
actual and calculated Bus
Voltage during power up.
Failure to meet this threshold
will result in a LS CHARGE
Fault and can be an indication
PRE CHGE THRESH
none
of a loaded down Bus. Most
applications should use the
default value. Lowering this
value tightens the tolerance and
lead to nuisance faults. Raising
this value can cause loose
tolerance and risk damage to
Pre-Charge Resistors.
(Line Side PWM Frequency)
LS PWM
This parameter sets the PWM
kHz
FREQUENCY
or ‘carrier’ frequency of the
converter portion of the drive.
Default
Range
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
40.0
20.0 – 150.0
N
N
2.2
0.1 – 3.0
Y
N
28
1 – 60
N
N
10.0
8.0 – 12.0
N
N
Table 7: Line Side Power Convert A5
50
Quattro DC Motor A6 Submenu
Motor Parameters A6 submenu
Parameter
MOTOR ID
RATED MOTOR
CURR
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
FULL FLD
CURRENT
WEAK FLD
CURRENT
STANDBY FIELD
FLUX CNFRM
LEVEL
ARMATURE IR
DROP
Description
(Motor Identification) This parameter allows
for the selection of specific sets of motor
parameters. This is yet to be determined for
DC machines.
(Rated Armature Amps) Motor armature
amps. Note: value should be obtained from
the motor nameplate.
(Rated Armature Voltage) Rated motor
armature circuit voltage. Note: value should
be obtained from the motor nameplate.
(Full Field Current) This parameter sets
motor field amps at low speed. Note: value
should be obtained from the motor
nameplate.
(Weak Field Current) This parameter sets
the motor field amps at contract. Adjust as
necessary to obtain rated armature volts at
contract speed at full load up. May be the
same as or lower than Full field Amps for
motor field weakening. Motor field current
will automatically begin to weaken when
motor speed is Contract Speed x Weak
Field/Full Field and follow a profile for
constant CEMF.
(Standby field Amps) Motor field current
during drive standby conditions. Motor
current will automatically drop to this level
when idle after STNDBY FIELD TIME has
expired.
(Flux Confirm Level) Determines the
minimum motor field current necessary
before drive is allowed to start. Arranged as
a percent of Full Field ampere setting. This
ensures that pre-torque current to motor will
produce adequate torque when the elevator
Brake is released. A lower setting will allow
the drive to come alive earlier in the start
cycle to help prevent unnecessary starting
delays. Units in percent of full field.
(Armature IR Drop) Adjusts motor armature
current regulator for expected current x
resistance voltage drop of motor armature
circuit at rated current. Includes motor
armature, inter-poles and wiring resistance.
Enter as a percent of rated armature volts.
This parameter also affects the sensitivity of
the fault, Encoder Fault.
Note: This equation is only valid after an
Auto Tune has been done. For information
on auto tuning the motor, see page 111.
 AUTO   RATED 
MEAS  
 ARM  MOTOR 
 ARM 
R (D2)   CURR(A6)




100 IR
DROP
 ARMATURE
 (A6) 
 VOLTS (A6)




51
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
-
-
-
N
Y
amps
0.0
1.0 – 400.0
N
Y
volts
0
55 – 600
N
N
amps
0.0
1.0 – 40.0
N
N
amps
0.0
1.0 – 40.0
N
N
amps
0.0
0.0 – 40.0
N
N
%
85.0
25.0 – 99.0
N
N
%
0.0
0.0 – 25.0
N
N
Quattro DC Motor A6 Submenu
Parameter
TACH VOLT
SENSE
Description
(Tachometer Voltage Sense)
Sets the minimum armature voltage where
the Encoder Loss and Reverse Tach
functions will become operative. This
parameter prevents nuisance encoder faults
during low speeds and high torque
conditions by adjusting the encoder loss
sensitivity to motor IR drop. Works in
conjunction with TACH SPEED SENSE. An
ENCODER FLT will be declared if the
following two equalities are satisfied:
TACH VOLT

 SENSE (A6)
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
%
25.0
0.1 – 60.0
N
N
%
5.0
0.1 – 40.0
N
N
%
110
100 – 150
N
Y
sec
60.0
5.0 – 120.0
N
Y
  ARMATURE   ARMATURE 
  
  

 VOLTAGE (A6)  VOLTAGE (D2) 
and
CONTRACT
TACH SPEED  

   CAR
SENSE
(A6)

  SPEED (A1)

TACH SPEED
SENSE
  SPEED 
 

   FEEDBACK 
  (D1)

 

(Tachometer Speed Sense)
Sets the level of measured speed feedback
below which an Encoder Loss Fault is
declared – once motor armature voltage
conditions are satisfied. Works in conjunction
with TACH VOLT SENSE. An ENCODER
FLT will be declared if the following two
equalities are satisfied:
TACH VOLT

 SENSE (A6)
  ARMATURE   ARMATURE 
  
  

 VOLTAGE (A6)  VOLTAGE (D2) 
and
CONTRACT
TACH SPEED  

   CAR
SENSE
(A6)

  SPEED (A1)

OVLD START
LEVEL
OVLD TIME OUT
  SPEED 
 

   FEEDBACK 
  (D1)

 

(Motor Overload Start Level)
This parameter defines maximum current at
which motor can run continuously without
triggering the motor overload. One of the
two parameters that define the motor
overload curve. Set as a percent of Rated
Motor Current. For more information on the
motor overload curve, see OVLD TIME OUT
and OVLD START LEVEL on page 54.
(Motor Overload Time Out)
This parameter defines the amount of time
before a motor overload alarm occurs when
the motor is running at the current level
defined below:
 OVLD

 START
 LEVEL

 40 %
 
  rated
 
motor
:  
current








This is the other parameter used to define
the overload curve. For more information on
the motor overload curve, see OVLD TIME
OUT and OVLD START LEVEL on page 54.
52
Quattro DC Motor A6 Submenu
Parameter
Description
(Saved Measured Armature Circuit
Inductance)
Affects tuning of the armature current
regulator. This parameter will automatically
SAVE MEAS ARM fill with measured value AUTO MEAS ARM
L
R (D2) after Auto-Tune. This parameter is
used only if GAIN SELECTION (A4) is set to
USE SAVED PAR.
Note: This parameter cannot be adjusted via
the handheld operator.
(Saved Armature IR Drop)
Adjusts motor armature current regulator for
expected current multiplied by resistance
voltage drop of motor armature circuit at
rated current. Includes motor armature,
inter-poles and wiring resistance. This
parameter will automatically fill with the
SAVE IR DROP
measured value AUTO MEAS IR DROP (D2)
after Auto-Tune. This parameter also affects
the sensitivity of the fault, Encoder Fault.
This parameter is used only if GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to USE SAVED
PAR.
Note: This parameter cannot be adjusted via
the handheld operator.
(Saved Measured Armature Circuit
Resistance)
Affects tuning of the armature current
regulator. This parameter will automatically
SAVE MEAS ARM fill with measured value AUTO MEAS ARM L
R
(D2) after Auto-Tune. This parameter is
used only if GAIN SELECTION (A4) is set to
USE SAVED PAR.
Note: This parameter cannot be adjusted via
the handheld operator.
(Saved Measured Field Resistance)
Affects tuning of the field current regulator.
This parameter automatically fills in with
AUTO MEAS FIELD RES (D2) after autoSAVE FIELD RES tune. This parameter is used only if GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to USE SAVED
PAR.
Note: This parameter cannot be adjusted via
the handheld operator.
(Saved Measured Field Time Constant)
Affects tuning of the field current regulator.
This parameter automatically fills in with
AUTO MEAS FIELD TC (D2) after auto-tune.
SAVE FIELD TC
This parameter is used only if GAIN
SELECTION (A4) is set to USE SAVED
PAR.
Note: This parameter cannot be adjusted via
the handheld operator.
53
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Units
Default
Range
mH
0.00
0.00 –
327.67
N
Y
%
0.0
0.0 –
3276.7
N
Y
ohm
0.0000
0.0000 –
3.2767
N
Y
ohm
0.0
0.0 –
3276.7
Y
Y
sec
0.000
0.000 –
32.767
N
Y
Quattro DC Motor A6 Submenu
The drive will only declare a motor overload
alarm and the user is responsible for taking
appropriate action to protect equipment.
The motor overload alarm can also be
assigned to a logic output. See configuration
sub-menu items, C3.
OVLD TIME OUT and OVLD START LEVEL
These two parameters are used to define the
overload curve.
The user can adjust the motor overload
parameters. Three overload curves are shown
in the examples below. Curve #1 is the default
motor overload curve.
curve #1
curve #2
curve #3
OVLD START
LEVEL
110%
110%
120%
The drive can also be configured so that a
motor overload event declares a Fault, which
will automatically cause the drive to stop. If
this is desirable, the following needs to be
completed:
 solid state relay or relay coil is configured
to MTR OVERLOAD
 logic input configured to EXT FAULT
 wire the EXT FAULT logic input terminal to
the to MTR OVERLOAD relay output
terminal
 wire one side of the normally open relay to
+24V (TB1-11 or TB1-46)
With the above set-up, the drive will then
declare an External Fault on a motor overload.
OVLD TIME
OUT
60 sec
40 sec
70 sec
Motor Overload Parameters
When the motor usage exceeds the user
defined motor overload curve, the drive will
declare a motor overload alarm.
ALARM!
MTR OVERLOAD
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
54
Quattro DC Motor A6 Submenu
10,000
1000
default
motor
overload
trip time
(seconds)
Curve #1
curve #3
OLVD TIME
OUT = 70 sec
100
Curve #2
Curve #3
curve #1
OLVD TIME
OUT = 60 sec
curve #2
OLVD TIME
OUT = 40 sec
10
110%
130
%
150%
170%
190%
210%
current (percentage of rated motor current)
curve #1
OLVD START
LEVEL = 110%
curve #2
OLVD START
LEVEL = 110%
curve #3
OLVD START
LEVEL = 120%
Figure 16: Motor Overload Curve
55
230%
250%
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Configure C0 menu
User Switches C1 submenu
Parameter
SPD
COMMAND
SRC
RUN
COMMAND
SRC
FIELD ENA
SOURCE
Description
Default
Choices
(Speed Command Source)
This parameter designates the source of the
drive’s speed command. The four possible
sources for the speed command are following:
 Serial Channel - a RS-422 serial port located
on the customer interface PCB.
 Analog Channel – a bipolar (10V) signal.
Available with the analog channel is a Speed
Command Multiplier (SPD COMMAND
MULT(A1)) and Speed Command Bias (SPD
COMMAND BIAS(A1)). These parameters
are used to scale the user’s analog speed
 serial
command to the proper range for use by the
 multi-step
MULTI-STEP
drive software.
 ser mult step
 Multi-Step Command - user defined fifteen
 analog input
discrete speed commands (CMD1 - CMD15
in A3 submenu). Four logic inputs are used
as speed command selections. CMD0 is
reserved for zero speed, but the user can
specify CMD1 - CMD15 to be any speed
command either positive or negative. See
Multistep Ref A3 on page 45.
 Ser Mult Step Command - user defined
fifteen discrete speed commands (CMD1 CMD15 in A3 submenu). Four bits in the
serial protocol are toggled to run multi-step
serially. See Multistep Ref A3 on page 45.
(Run Command Source)
This parameter allows the user to choose the
source of the run command from one of the
following sources: an external run signal from a
 external tb
logic input (external tb), a run signal transferred EXTERNAL
 serial
TB
across a serial channel (serial), or a signal from
 serial+extrn
both the serial channel and a logic input
(serial+extrn). If a signal is required from a logic
input (either externaltb or serial+extrn), the Run
signal on TB1 must be selected.
(Field Enable Source)
Enabling the Field Source initially turns on the
Line Side Boost, than establishes a field. This
may be done through a logic input (set FIELD
ENA SOURCE to EXTERNAL TB), serially, (set
FIELD ENA SOURCE to SERIAL), by the run
command (set FIELD ENA SOURCE to
ENABLE ON RUN), or by 2-bit serial. 2-bit
 external tb
serial uses two bits given to the drive serially to
 serial
control the field. See the table below for the bit ENABLE ON  enable on
RUN
options. Bit 1 refers to Full Field bit while Bit 0
run
refers to Standby Field Bit. While the motor is
 2-bit serial
running, both Boost and Field are on.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Boost Field
0
0
Off
Off
1
~
On
Full Field or Weak Fld
depending on speed
0
1
On
Standby
56
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
HI/LO GAIN
SRC
Description
Default
(High / low gain change switch source)
This parameter determines the source of the
high / low gain switch.
The speed regulator high / low gain function was
developed in response to high performance
elevator requirements where the resonant
nature of the elevator system interferes with the
speed response of the drive.
For more information, see HI/LO GAIN SRC on
page 65.
(Speed Regulator Type)
This switch toggles between the Elevator Speed
Regulator (Ereg), the PI Speed Regulator,
external reg, and cemf reg. Magnetek
recommends the use of the Elevator Speed
Regulator for better elevator performance with
multi-step speed applications or when an active
torque Feed Forward signal is not available.
Choices
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
 internal
INTERNAL  external tb
 serial
Y
N




Y
N
If set to CEMF REG, the drive will not use the
encoder as feedback, but rather the armature
voltage. Note: this is only meant for
maintenance. For more information, see
Armature Voltage Feedback on page 26.
If set to External Regulator, the drive will be
configured as a torque controller. The source of
the external torque command is determined by
the EXT TORQ CMD SRC (C1) parameter.
SPEED REG
TYPE
WARNING
If using an external speed regulator, which
produces an analog torque command to
Quattro (SPEED REG TYPE (C1) =
external reg and EXT TORQ CMD SRC
(C1) = analog input), it is imperative that the
encoder polarity matches the armature
voltage. To verify polarity, insert a torque
command into the analog input. Check
ENCODER SPD (D2) against ARMATURE
VOLTAGE (D2). Verify they are the same
polarity. If not, swap A and /A or change
the ENCODER CONNECT (C1) parameter.
IMPORTANT: This assumes the car controller is
doing its own closed-loop speed regulation. (i.e.
a completely closed outer speed loop with the
car controller having its own encoder feedback).
The drive has the following three closed loop
speed regulation options and an option for
turning off the internal speed regulator:
 Elevator Speed Regulator (Ereg) (see page 66)
 PI Speed Regulator (see page 66)
 External Speed Regulator
57
ELEV SPD
REG
elev spd reg
pi speed reg
external reg
cemf reg
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
MOTOR
ROTATION
ENCODER
CONNECT
SPD REF
RELEASE
CONT
CONFIRM
SRC
TACH
FILTER
PreTorque
SOURCE
Description
Default
Choices
(Motor Rotation)
This parameter allows the user to change the
direction of the motor rotation. As an example, if
 forward
the car controller is commanding the up
FORWARD
direction and the car is actually going in a down
 reverse
direction, this parameter can be changed to
allow the motor rotation to match the car
controller command.
(Encoder Connection)
 forward
This parameter allows the user to electronically
FORWARD
switch A and /A signals from the encoder
 reverse
without moving any wiring.
(Speed Reference Release)
The user can select when the Speed Reference
Release signal is asserted:
 If the user does not want the drive to wait for
the mechanical brake to be picked then SPD
REF RELEASE can be made equal to REG
REG
 reg release
RELEASE;
RELEASE  brake picked
 If the user does want the drive to wait for the
brake to be picked then SPD REF
RELEASE is not asserted until an internal
BRAKE PICKED signal becomes true. The
user must have one logic input set to Mech
Brk Pick – see page 68.
(Contactor Confirm Source)
This switch selects if hardware confirmation of
motor contactor closure is necessary before
 external tb
NONE
drive attempts to pass current through motor. If
 none
hardware confirmation is available set to
EXTERNAL TB and select the Contact Cfirm
signal on a logic input terminal – see page 68.
(Tach Filter)
 off
OFF
Determines if encoder feedback is filtered per
 on
TACH FILTER BW (A1).
(Pre-Torque Source)
This switch determines the source of a pre
torque command and how it is used.
Pre-torque is the value of torque that the drive
should produce as soon as the speed regulator
is released to prevent rollback due to
unbalanced elevator loads.
This ‘priming’ of the speed regulator is done with
the pre-torque command, which is used when
the speed regulator release is asserted.
 none
The two possible sources for the pre-torque
NONE
 analog input
command are following:
 serial

serial channel

analog channel
The serial channel is the RS-422 serial port on
the Customer Interface PCB. The analog pretorque signal is bipolar (±10V). Available with
the analog channel is a Pre-Torque Command
Multiplier (PRE TORQUE MULT (A1)) and PreTorque Bias (PRE TORQUE BIAS(A1)). These
parameters are used to scale the user’s analog
pre-torque command to the proper range for use
by the drive software.
58
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
PreTorque
LATCH
Ptorq
LATCH
CLCK
FAULT
RESET SRC
Description
Default
Choices
(PreTorque Latch) If Pre-Torque latching is
NOT selected, the Pre-Torque signal must be
valid when the speed regulator is commanded to
run. For verification on timing, see NORMAL
operating sequence on page 23.
Some car controllers send both analog pretorque and speed commands . To facilitate this,
the Drive has the option of latching the pretorque command.
If pre-torque latching is selected using the PreTorque Latch parameter, a FALSE to TRUE
transition on the pre-torque latch clock latches
the value on the pre-torque channel into the
NOT
 latched
drive. This channel is allowed to change any
LATCHED  not latched
time except during this transition without
affecting the value of the latched pre-torque
command.
The Pre-Torque Latch Clock controls when the
pre-torque command is latched. The Pre-Torque
Latch clock parameter (Ptorq LATCH CLCK)
determines the source of this latch control. The
two choices for latch control are the serial
channel or a logic input (EXTERNAL TB).
The speed regulator uses the latched pre-torque
command when the internal Speed Regulator
Release signal is asserted. Once the pre-torque
command is used, the latch and the pre-torque
command are cleared.
(Pre-Torque Latch Clock) If the PRE-TORQUE
LATCH has been set to LATCHED, then this
EXTERNAL  external tb
parameter chooses the source for latch control.
TB
 serial
If set to EXTERNAL TB1, the Pre-Torq Latch
signal on TB1 must be selected.
(Fault Reset Source)
This parameter determines the source of the
drive’s external fault reset from one of the
following sources: an external fault reset signal
from a logic input (external tb), a fault reset
signal transferred across a serial channel
(serial), or the drive automatically resets the
faults (automatic). The user also has the option
to reset faults directly through the operator.
Automatic Fault Reset: If the fault reset source
is set to automatic, the faults will be reset
according to the setting of the FLT RESET
 external tb
DELAY (A1) and FLT RESETS/HOUR (A1)
EXTERNAL
parameters. When a logic input is defined as
 serial
TB
“fault reset” and this logic input signal is
 automatic
transitioned from false to true: an active fault will
be reset and automatic fault reset counter
(defined by FLT RESETS/HOUR(A1)) will be
reset to zero.
CAUTION: If the run signal is asserted at the
time of a fault reset, the drive will immediately
go into a run state. Unless using the auto-fault
reset function (FAULT RESET SRC (C1) =
automatic), then the run command needs to be
cycled to be reset automatically, but will reset if
initiated by a logic input without cycling the run
command.
59
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Default
(Overspeed Test Source)
This switch determines the source of the
overspeed test. Operation of the overspeed test
OVERSPD
function is specified by the OVRSPEED MULT
TEST SRC
(A1) parameter. Regardless of the setting of
this parameter, the user can call for the
overspeed test via the Digital Operator.
(Brake Pick Source)
If the BRAKE PICK SRC (C1) is set to
BRAKE PICK
INTERNAL, the Drive will attempt to pick (lift)
SRC
the brake when magnetizing current has been
developed in the motor.
(Brake Pick Confirm)
If this switch is set to EXTERNAL TB, the Drive
will wait for brake pick confirmation before
releasing the speed reference. When set to
BRAKE PICK
EXTERNAL TB, the MECH BRK PICK signal on
CNFM
TB1 must also be selected. If ON SPEED CMD
is selected, the drive will wait for a non-zero
speed command before releasing the speed
reference.
(Brake Hold Source)
BRAKE
If set to internal, the drive will command the
HOLD SRC
mechanical brake to hold mode after
confirmation of brake picked exists.
(Ramp Stop Select)
This parameter allows the selection of the
Torque Ramp Down Stop function. This
function is used to gradually remove the torque
RAMPED
command after the elevator has stopped and the
STOP SEL
mechanical brake has been set. This prevents a
shock and possible ‘bump’ felt in the elevator
from the torque signal going to zero too quickly.
For more information, see Ramp Stop Select on
page 67.
(Ramp Down Enable Source)
If RUN LOGIC is selected, the user can remove
the run command and the drive will delay in
RAMP
dropping the run command until torque ramp
DOWN EN
down stop function is complete.
SRC
If EXTERNAL TB or SERIAL is selected, the
user must keep the run command while allowing
the Torque Ramp Down Stop function to be
completed.
(Brake Pick Fault Enable)
When this parameter is set to ENABLE, the
BRK PICK
brake pick command and confirmation must
FLT ENA
match within the specified time determined by
the BRK PICK TIME (A1) parameter or a brake
pick fault is declared.
(Brake Hold Fault Enable)
When this parameter is set to ENABLE, the
BRK HOLD brake hold command and confirmation must
FLT ENA
match within the specified time determined by
the BRK HOLD TIME (A1) parameter or a brake
hold fault is declared.
60
Choices
EXTERNAL  external tb
TB
 serial
INTERNAL
NONE
INTERNAL
NONE
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
 internal
 serial
Y
N
 none
 ramp on stop
Y
N
Y
N
 internal
 serial




none
external tb
internal time
on speed
cmd
 external tb
EXTERNAL
 run logic
TB
 serial
DISABLE
 disable
 enable
Y
N
DISABLE
 disable
 enable
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Default
Choices
NONE
 none
 serial
 analog input
Y
N
 disabled
 enabled
Y
N
(Torque Command Source)
Sets the source of an external torque command,
if any. Selections are:
 NONE: no external torque command used
 SERIAL: supplied via the serial link
 ANALOG: supplied via an analog input
channel
EXT TORQ
CMD SRC
DIR
CONFIRM
WARNING
If using an external torque command
(SPEED REG TYPE (C1) = external reg and
EXT TORQ CMD SRC (C1) = analog input),
it is imperative that the encoder polarity
matches incoming torque command polarity.
To verify polarity, insert a positive torque
command into the analog input. Check
ENCODER FEEDBACK (D1) to verify it is
also a positive value. If not, swap A and /A
or change the ENCODER CONNECT (C1)
parameter.
NOTE:
 if SPEED REG TYPE (C1) is set to external
reg and EXT TORQ CMD SRC (C1) is set to
serial or analog, the drive is a torque
controller
 if SPEED REG TYPE (C1) is set for a speed
regulator (either pi speed reg or elev spd reg)
and EXT TORQ CMD SRC (C1) is set to
either analog or serial, the torque command
will be used as an auxiliary torque command
(torque feedforward command)
(Direction Confirm)
When enabled, the function allows confirmation
of the polarity of the initial analog speed
command via the Run Up or Run Down logic
input commands.
 If the Run Up logic input is selected and true
with the polarity of the analog signal positive,
then the analog speed command is accepted
unchanged.
 If the logic input Run Down logic input is
selected and true with the polarity of the
analog speed command negative, the analog
speed command is accepted unchanged.
 If however, the logic input Run Up is true and
the polarity is negative or the logic input Run
Down is true and the polarity is positive, then
the speed command is held at zero.
61
DISABLED
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
S-CURVE
ABORT
PRIORITY
MESSAGE
STOPPING
MODE
Description
Default
Choices
(S-Curve Abort)
This parameter, S-CURVE ABORT (C1),
addresses how the S-Curve Speed Reference
Generator handles a reduction in the speed
command before the S-Curve Generator has
reached its target speed.
Disabled: With a normal S-curve function, a
change in the speed command is never allowed
to violate the defined acceleration or jerk rates.
If a reduction in the speed command is issued
before the S-Curve generator has reached its
target speed, then the jerk rate dictates what
speed is reached before the speed may be
 disabled
DISABLED
reduced.
 enabled
Enabled: The optional S-Curve abort has been
selected. In this case when the speed command
is reduced, the speed reference immediately
starts to reduce violating the jerk limit (thus no
jerk out phase), which could be felt in the
elevator.
For optional S-Curve abort to be active:
 The speed command source must be
selected as Multi-step (SPD COMMAND
SRC=multi-step).
 The S-curve Abort function must be
ENABLED (S-CURVE ABORT = enabled).
(Priority Message Enabling)
With Priority Message disabled the user will not
see priority messages meaning faults and
 disable
alarms will not be displayed on the operator, but
ENABLE
the faults will be placed into the fault history and
 enable
active fault lists with the Fault LED on. Leave
Priority Message enabled when drive is not
being worked on.
(Multi-step Stopping Mode Selection)
When the speed command source is set to
multi-step (SPD COMMAND SRC (C1)=multistep), the parameter, STOPPING MODE (C1),
determines the stopping mode of the Drive. The
two selectable methods for the Stopping Mode
parameter are “Immediate” and “Ramp to stop”.
Note: If the SPD COMMAND SRC (C1)
parameter is set to any other definition other
than “multi-step”, the drive will behave to the
“immediate” stopping mode (independent of the
setting of the STOPPING MODE (C1)
parameter).
 immediate
IMMEDIATE
 ramp to stop
The “Immediate” stopping mode requires the
drive to be at zero speed prior to removing the
“Run” command. The “Immediate“ selection is
how the drive has traditionally behaved prior to
the addition of this parameter.
The “Ramp to stop” stopping mode is intended
for use when removing the “Run” command prior
to the drive reaching zero speed (as defined by
the AB ZERO SPD LEV (A1) parameter). When
the “Run” command is removed and the speed
reference is above zero speed, the speed
reference will ramp to zero speed following the
selected s-curve.
62
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Default
(Auto Stop Function Enable)
When the speed command source is set to
multi-step or serial (SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1)=multi-step or serial), the parameter
determines the stopping mode of the drive. The
two selectable methods for the STOPPING
MODE (C1)* parameter are “Immediate” and
“Ramp to stop”.
The Auto Stop function determines how the
drive logic will respond to a zero or non-zero
speed command. The function will only work
when the speed command source is either multstep or serial (SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1)=multi-step or serial).
Disabled: When the Auto Stop function is
disabled, the magnitude of the speed command
plays no part in the logical starting or stopping of
the drive.
Enabled: When the Auto Stop function is
enabled and the speed command source is
either multi-step or serial, the following changes
occurs to the start and stop sequence:
AUTO STOP 
Both a Run command and a non-zero
speed command are required to start the
drive

Either the removal of the Run command or
the setting the speed command to zero will
initiate a stop.
Remember, when the auto stop function is
enabled (AUTO STOP (C1)=enabled) both a
non-zero multi-step/serial speed command AND
the run command are required to start the drive.
It makes no difference which signal is enabled
first, the drive does not start until both are
present. When initiating a stop, if STOPPING
MODE (C1) = RAMP TO STOP the drive will
behave the same if either the run or the speed
command is removed. If STOPPING MODE
(C1) = IMMEDIATE, the drive will immediate
drop SPD REF RLS and turn off SPD REG RLS
after BRAKE PICK TIME (A1). With this same
setup, if the speed command is removed before
the run command, the drive will behave the
same as if STOPPING MODE (C1) = Ramp to
Stop.
63
DISABLE
Choices
 enable
 disable
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
Y
N
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Parameter
Description
Default
(DSPR Enable)
Turns Drive Standby Power Reduction (DSPR)
feature ON or OFF.
The choices are:
ENABLE – Drive will turn motor field current off,
shut down the input rectifier and open AC line
input contactor after being in a Standby
condition for longer than [DSPR Time] minutes.
DSPR
ENABLE
DISABLE – DPSR function not active. Drive will
remain in Standby condition with utility input
contactor closed until commanded to re-start.
If DSPR is active, the drive will close the utility
input contactor and re-start when a valid run or
field enable command is received. A delay of
several seconds may elapse while power control
sections of the drive are re-started.
(Anti-Rollback Select) With ARB Select set to
enabled, the drive will use its independent
function for Anti-Rollback. This cannot be used
ARB SELECT
in conjunction with PreTorque. For information
on how to setup ARB, see Anti-Rollback on
page 114.
Serial Mode
Selects the serial protocol
SER2 FLT
Mode
Selects the fault response to be used when
running serial mode 2.
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
DISABLE
 disable
 enable
Y
N
DISABLE
 disable
 enable
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
None
Immediate
Table 8: User Switches C1 Submenu
64
Choices
 None
 Mode 1
 Mode 2
 Mode 2 test
 Immediate
 Run Remove
 Rescue
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
An example of internal high / low gain control
is shown below.
Detailed descriptions
HI/LO GAIN SRC
(High / Low Gain Source)
This parameter determines the source of the
high / low gain switch.
The speed regulator high / low gain function
was developed in response to high
performance elevator requirements where the
resonant nature of the elevator system
interferes with the speed response of the drive.
When the speed response (gain) is set to high
levels, the resonant characteristics created by
the spring action of the elevator ropes can
cause car vibration. To solve this problem, the
speed regulator is set to a low enough
response (gain) so that the resonant
characteristics of the ropes are not excited.
This is accomplished by controlling the
sensitivity or response of the speed regulator
via the high / low gain switch and gain reduce
multiplier.
By using the gain reduce multiplier, the user
can specify a lower response (gain) for the
speed regulator when the drive is at higher
speeds. The gain reduce multiplier (GAIN
REDUCE MULT(A1)) tells the software how
much lower, as a percentage, the speed
regulator response (gain) should be.
The high / low gain switch determines when
the drive is in ‘low gain’ mode. In the ‘low gain’
mode, the gain reduce multiplier has an effect
on the speed regulator’s response (gain).
The drive allows for the high / low gain switch
to be controlled either externally or internally.
The high / low gain source parameter (HI/LO
GAIN SRC) allows for this external or internal
selection.
The high / low gain switch can be controlled
externally by either:
 a logic input
 the serial channel
The high / low gain switch can also be
controlled internal by:
 the gain change level parameter (GAIN
CHNG LEVEL), which defines a
percentage of contract speed
With the drive set to internal control, the speed
regulator will go into ‘low gain’ mode when the
drive senses the motor is above a defined
speed level. The defined speed level is
determined by the gain change level
parameter.
Quattro Parameter Settings
HI/LO GAIN SRC = internal
GAIN REDUCE MULT = 80%
GAIN CHNG LEVEL = 10 %
RESPONSE = 10.0 rad/sec
Response of
Speed Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
100%
contract
speed
10%
contract
speed
0%
contract
speed
speed
reference
low gain
mode
Response of
Speed Regulator
8.0 rad/sec
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
Response of
Speed Regulator
10.0 rad/sec
High / Low Gain Example
65
10%
contract
speed
0%
contract
speed
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
Elevator Speed Regulator (Ereg)
The use of the Elevator Speed Regulator
allows the overall closed loop response
between speed reference and speed to be
ideal for elevator applications. The desirable
features of the Elevator Speed Regulator are:
 no overshoot at the end of accel period
 no overshoot at the end of decel period
PI Speed Regulator
When the Proportional plus Integral (PI) speed
regulator is used, the response to a speed
reference is different. As an example, the PI
Speed Regulator’s speed response is shown
below for a ramped speed reference. With the
PI speed regulator, the end of each accel and
decel period, there will be an overshoot. The
amount of overshoot will be a function of the
defined phase margin and response
parameters.
Because of this overshoot, the PI regulator is
not recommended for elevator control by itself.
However, the PI regulator is the proper choice
when a live torque demand signal is available
from the car controller as an always-active
Feed-Forward compensating signal. See
EXTERNAL TORQ SRC (C1).
One characteristic of the Elevator Speed
Regulator is that during the accel / decel
period the speed feedback does not match the
speed reference creating a speed error or
tracking delay. As an example, the Elevator
Speed Regulator’s speed response is shown
for a ramped speed reference below.
no
overshoot
speed
commanded
speed
speed error
speed
feedback
tracking delay
overshoot
speed
speed
reference
commanded
speed
speed
reference
zero tracking delay
time
speed
feedback
Ereg Example
The Elevator Speed Regulator is tuned by:
 System Inertia parameter (INERTIA(A1)),
which is easy to obtain by using the drive
software to estimate the system inertia.
 Response parameter (RESPONSE(A1)),
which is the overall regulator bandwidth in
radians per sec. This parameter defines
the responsiveness of the speed regulator.
The tracking delay shown is defined as
(1/RESPONSE) seconds. The tracking delay
is not effected by the gain reduce multiplier.
The inner loop crossover parameter (INNER
LOOP XOVER(A1)) should not need to be
changed. But if the number is changed, it
must satisfy the following formula:
time
PI Speed Regulator Example
The PI Speed Regulator is tuned by:
 System Inertia parameter (INERTIA(A1)),
which is easy to obtain by using the drive
software to estimate the system inertia.
 Response parameter (RESPONSE(A1)),
which is the overall regulator bandwidth in
radians per sec. This parameter defines
the responsiveness of the speed regulator.
 Speed Phase Margin parameter (SPD
PHASE MARGIN(A1)) is used only by the
PI Speed Regulator to define the phase
margin of the speed regulator.
inner
gain
loop
 response  reduce
crossover
multiplier
66
Quattro DC User Switches C1 Submenu
The Ramp Down Enable has the following
three possible sources:
 An input logic bit (EXTERNAL TB)
 The run logic – initiated by the removal of
the run command
 The serial channel
The Ramp Down Enable Source parameter
(RAMP DOWN EN SRC(C1)) is used to select
one of the above options.
A method of providing the Ramp Down Enable
would be with a logic signal (EXTERNAL TB)
that is dedicated to that function. The Ramp
Down Enable would be asserted while the Run
command is still present and remain there until
the ramp is completed, after which the Run
command would be removed.
The RUN LOGIC option to trigger the Ramp
Down Enable from the Run command is
provided. In this case, removal of the Run
command enables the Ramp Down Stop
Function.
The time it takes for the Drive to perform its
ramped stop is determined by the Ramped
Stop Time Parameter. The Ramped Stop
Time parameter (RAMPED STOP TIME(A1))
selects the amount of time it would take for the
drive to ramp from the rated torque to zero
torque.
Ramp Stop Select
This parameter allows the selection of the
Torque Ramp Down Stop function. This
function is used to gradually remove the torque
command after the elevator has stopped and
the mechanical brake has been set. This
prevents a shock and possible ‘bump’ felt in
the elevator from the torque signal going to
zero too quickly.
A function unique to elevators involves the
interaction between the motor torque and the
mechanical brake that holds the elevator.
Under full load conditions at the end of a run, if
the brake is set and the motor torque is
removed quickly, some brake slippage may
occur. Therefore, the option of gradually
reducing the motor torque is provided by the
Torque Ramp Down Stop function.
Upon being enabled by the Ramped Stop
Select Parameter (RAMPED STOP SEL(C1)),
the torque command is linearly ramped to zero
from the value that was present when the
‘Ramp Down Enable’ was selected.
67
Quattro DC Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
Logic Inputs C2 submenu
(Logic Inputs 1-9)
This parameter defines the function of the logic
inputs.
NOTE: The user can assign particular
functions to each input terminal. Only one
function per terminal is allowed and multiple
terminals cannot have the same function
(except “No Function”). When a function is
assigned to an input terminal, it is removed
from the list of possible selections for
Parameter
subsequent terminals. To re-assign a
function to a different terminal one must
first assign “No Function” to the original
terminal so that the desired function is
returned to the list of selections and can be
assigned to a different new terminal.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Description
Default
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
(Normally Closed Inputs) All Logic Inputs may
be configured for use with Normally Open or
Normally Closed external contacts. The
numeric entry is a hexadecimal
representation of a binary control bit for each
channel. A binary 0 means Normally Open.
A binary 1 indicates a Normally Closed
external switch. Logic Input #1 is the least
significant bit. The defaulted value of 0001
indicates logic input 1 is normally closed.
most significant
byte
least significant
byte
Binary 0000, 0000, 0000, 0000
Logic Input #9
N.C. INPUTS
LOGIC INPUT 1 TB1(1)
LOGIC INPUT 2 TB1(2)
LOGIC INPUT 3 TB1(3)
LOGIC INPUT 4 TB1(4)
LOGIC INPUT 5 TB1(5)
LOGIC INPUT 6 TB1(6)
LOGIC INPUT 7 TB1(7)
LOGIC INPUT 8 TB1(8)
LOGIC INPUT 9 TB1(9)
Logic Input #1
See table below for converting binary to hex:
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
logic input #1 note: drive comes pre-wired
for logic input #1 to be CONTACT CFIRM
logic input #2 note: drive comes pre-wired
for logic input #2 to be CTR PWR SENSE
logic input #3
logic input #4
logic input #5
logic input #6
logic input #7
logic input #8
logic input #9
68
0001
Note: the LSB is
fixed at 01
Y
Y
CONTACT CFIRM
Y
N
CTR PWR SENSE
Y
N
NO FUNCTION
DRIVE ENABLE
RUN
UP/DWN
STEP REF B0
STEP REF B1
FAULT RESET
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Quattro DC Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
choices
(Contactor closed) Feedback from an auxiliary contact on the motor contactor. Default is that the drive
expects a normally closed contact to energize the input when the contactor is not pulled in.
(Contactor Power Sensing) Energized when AC power is available to energize the motor contactor.
Power to this circuit is control by elevator relay logic. This circuit must be energized before the drive
ctr pwr sense
will be allowed to start. If power is not available when told to start, or while running, a Fault will occur
for diagnostic purposes.
(Drive Enable) Enables drive to run. This signal must be asserted to permit drive to run. This does not
drive enable
initiate run, just permits initiation.
extrn fault 1
(External Fault 1) User input fault #1.
Closure of this contact will cause the drive to declare a
extrn fault 2
(External Fault 2) User input fault #2.
fault and perform a fault shutdown.
extrn fault 3
(External Fault 3) User input fault #3.
(External Fault 4) User input fault #4. Opening of this contact will cause the drive to declare a fault and
extrn /flt 4
perform a fault shutdown.
(Fault Reset) Asserting this input attempts to reset faults. If the FAULT RESET SRC (C1) switch is set
to EXTERNAL TB, the drive’s fault circuit will be reset when this signal is true. If the FAULT RESET
fault reset
SRC (C1) switch is set to AUTOMATIC, the drive’s fault circuit will be reset when this signal is true and
the automatic fault reset counter (defined by FLT RESETS/HOUR) will be reset to zero. *This input is
edge sensitive and the fault is reset on the transition from false to true.
(Field Enable) If FIELD ENA SOURCE (C1) switch is set to EXTERNAL TB, the field is enabled when
field enable
this signal is true.
(Low Gain Select) If the HI/LO GAIN SRC (C1) switch is set to EXTERNAL TB, the low gain mode is
low gain sel
chosen for the speed regulator when this signal is true.
mech brk
(Mechanical Brake Hold) Auxiliary contact closures confirming when the mechanical brake is in the hold
hold
mode (engaged).
(Mechanical Brake Pick) Closure of auxiliary contacts confirming the mechanical brake has been picked
mech brk pick
(lifted).
(No Function) When this setting is selected for one of the TB1 input terminals, any logic input
no function
connected to that terminal will have no effect on drive operation.
(Overspeed Test Source) This function works only if the OVRSPEED TEST SRC (C1) switch is set to
EXTERNAL TB. A true signal on this input applies the OVERSPEED MULT to the speed command for
the next run. After the run command has dropped, the drive returns to ‘normal’ mode and must be reospd test src configured to perform the overspeed function again. The OVERSPEED FLT level is also increased by
the OVERSPEED MULT, allowing the elevator to overspeed without tripping out on an overspeed fault.
NOTE: This input must be taken false then true each time that an overspeed test is run. If the input is
left in the true, it is ignored after the first overspeed test.
(Pre-Torque Latch) Closing a contact between this input and ground latches the pre torque command
pre-trq latch
present on the analog channel #2.
run
(Run) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will start drive operation.
(Run Down) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will start drive
operation with negative speed commands.
Note: if both RUN UP and RUN DOWN are true then the run is not recognized.
run down
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled, this input will not change the polarity of the speed command
and will be used to confirm the polarity of the analog speed command as well as starting the operation
of the drive.
(Run Up) If drive is enabled through the DRIVE ENABLE logic input, this function will start drive
operation with positive speed commands.
run up
Note: if both RUN UP and RUN DOWN are true then the run is not recognized.
Note: if DIR CONFIRM (C1) is enabled, this input is also used to confirm the polarity of the analog
speed command as well as starting the operation of the drive.
s-curve sel 0 Bit 0 of S-curve selection
These two bits are used to select one of four s-curve selections. For
more information, see S-Curves A2 submenu on page 43.
s-curve sel 1 Bit 1 of S-curve selection
(Serial Mode 2 Inspection Enable) Used only with custom serial protocol (mode 2)
Defines the logic input to be used as one of the two sources of inspection run command when using
ser2 insp ena
serial mode 2. This input must be true as well as a comparable inspection run command sent serially
for the drive to run in inspection mode.
step ref b0
Bit 0 of multi-step speed command selection
Four inputs, which must be used together as a 4step ref b1
Bit 1 of multi-step speed command selection
bit command for multi-step speed selection. For
more information, see Multistep Ref A3 submenu
step ref b2
Bit 2 of multi-step speed command selection
on page 45.
step ref b3
Bit 3 of multi-step speed command selection
trq ramp
(Torque Ramp Down Signal) This function works only if the RAMP STOP SEL (C1) switch is set to
down
RAMP TO STOP and RAMP DOWN EN SRC (C1) is set to EXTERNAL TB.
(Up/Down Signal) This signal is used to change the sign of the speed command. Default is FALSE;
up/dwn
therefore, positive commands are for the up direction and negative speed command are for the down
direction. Making this input true reverses the car’s direction.
contact cfirm
Table 9: Logic Inputs C2 Submenu
69
Quattro DC Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
Logic Outputs C3 submenu
RELAY COIL x
(Relay Logic Outputs 1-2)
This parameter defines the function of the
relay logic outputs.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
LOGIC OUTPUT x
(Logic Outputs 1-4)
This parameter defines the function of the logic
outputs.
NOTE: The current setting of each parameter
is displayed in all caps; all other choices in the
list are displayed in lower case.
Parameter
Description
LOGIC OUTPUT 1 (TB1-25)
logic output #1
note: drive comes pre-wired for logic
output #1 to be CLOSE CONTACT
LOGIC OUTPUT 2 (TB1-26)
LOGIC OUTPUT 3 (TB1-27)
LOGIC OUTPUT 4 (TB1-28)
LOGIC OUTPUT 5 (TB1-29)
LOGIC OUTPUT 6 (TB1-30)
LOGIC OUTPUT 7 (TB1-31)
SSR1(TB1-21/22)
SSR2 (TB1-23/24)
RELAY COIL 1 (TB1-1/3/5)
RELAY COIL 2 (TB1-8/10/12)
choices
alarm
alarm+flt
auto brake
b. ena status
brake hold
brake pick
brk hold flt
brk pick flt
car going dwn
car going up
charge fault
close contact
contactor flt
curr reg flt
drv overload
encoder flt
fault
Defaults
logic output #2
logic output #3
logic output #4
logic output #5
logic output #6
logic output #7
solid state relay #1
solid state relay #2
relay coil #1
relay coil #2
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
CLOSE CONTACT
Y
N
RUN COMMANDED
MTR OVERLOAD
ENCODER FLT
FAULT
SPEED REG RLS
SPEED REG RLS
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
NO FUNCTION
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
(Alarm) The output is true when an alarm is declared by the drive.
(Alarm and/or Fault) The output is true when a fault and/or an alarm is declared by the drive.
(Auto Brake) The output is controlled by the Auto Brake function and is used to open the
mechanical brake. (only multi-step speed commands)
(Base Enable Status) The output will be true when the contact for Base Block Input on TB2-7
and TB2-14 is closed. The output is false when the contact is open.
(Brake Hold) The output is true when the brake pick confirmation is received. It is used to
show the mechanical brake is remaining open. This function is used with brakes that need to
have less than 100% voltage to hold the brake open.
(Brake Pick) The output is true when the speed regulator is released and is used to open the
mechanical brake.
(Brake Hold Fault) The output is true when the brake hold command and the brake feedback
do not match for the user specified time.
(Brake Pick Fault) The output is true when the brake pick command and the brake feedback do
not match for the user specified time.
(Car Going Down) The output is true when the motor moves in negative direction faster than
the user specified speed.
(Car Going Up) The output is true when motor moves in positive direction faster than user
specified speed.
(Charging Fault)
The output is true when the DC bus voltage has not stabilized above the voltage fault level or
the charge contactor has not closed after charging.
(Close Motor Contactor) The output is true when the run command is given, the drive is
enabled, the software has initialized, and no faults are present.
(Contactor Fault) The output is true when the command to close the contactor and the
contactor feedback do not match before the user specified time.
(Current Regulator Fault) The output is true when the actual current measurement does not
match commanded current.
(Drive Overload) The output is true when the drive has exceeded the drive overload curve.
(Encoder Fault) The output is true when the encoder is disconnected or not functioning, while
attempting to run
(Fault) The output is true when a fault is declared by the drive.
70
Quattro DC Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
choices continued
(Motor Flux Confirmation) The output is true when the drive has confirmed there is enough
flux confirm
motor field current (flux) to issue a speed regulator release. Threshold is set by measured
motor field current being greater than that set at Motor parameter A6, Flux Confirm Level.
(Ground Fault) The output is true when the sum of all phase current exceeds 50% of rated
ground fault
current of the drive.
in low gain
(In Low Gain) The output is true when the speed regulator is in “low gain” or response mode.
(Motor Torque Limit) The output is true when the torque limit has been reached while the drive
is in the motoring mode. The motoring mode is defined as the drive delivering energy to the
motor trq lim
motor.
(Motor Overload) The output is true when the motor has exceeded the user defined motor
mtr overload
overload curve.
no faults
(No Faults) No faults are currently present on the drive.
(No Function) This setting indicates that the terminal or relay will not change state for any
no function
operating condition; i.e. the output signal will be constantly false.
not alarm
(Not Alarm) The output is true when an alarm is NOT present.
(Motor overload current fault) The output is true when the phase current has exceeded 300%
over curr flt
of rated current.
(Overspeed Fault) The output is true when the motor has gone beyond the user defined
overspeed flt
percentage contract speed for a specified amount of time.
(Heatsink Over Temperature Fault) The output is true when the drive’s heatsink has exceeded
overtemp flt
95C (203F).
overvolt flt
(Over Voltage Fault) The output is true when the DC bus voltage exceeds 825VDC.
(Over Temperature Alarm) The output is true when the drive’s heatsink temperature has
ovrtemp alarm
exceeded 85C (185F).
phase fault
(Phase Loss) The output is true when the drive senses an open motor phase.
(Ramp Down Enable)
The output is true after a torque ramp down stop has been initiated by either a logic input, the
ramp down ena
serial channel, or internally by the drive. When this output is true the torque is being ramped to
zero.
(Ready to Start) The output is true when the drive’s software has been initialized, no faults are
ready 2 start
present and the drive is not boosting.
(Ready to Run) The output is true when the drive’s software has been initialized, no faults are
ready to run
present and the drive is boosting.
(Regeneration Torque Limit) The output is true when the torque limit has been reached while
the drive is in the regenerative mode. The regenerative mode is defined as when the motor is
regen trq lim
returning energy to the drive. When the drive is in regenerative mode, the energy is dissipated
via the dynamic brake circuitry (internal brake IGBT and external brake resistor).
run commanded (Run Commanded) The output is true when the drive is being commanded to run.
(Run Command Confirm) The output is true after the software has initialized, no faults are
run confirm
present, the drive has been commanded to run, the contactor has closed and the IGBTs are
firing.
(Speed Deviation) The output is true when the speed feedback is failing to properly track the
speed dev
speed reference. The speed deviation needs to be above a user defined level. (Speed Dev. =
reference - feedback)
(Speed Deviation Low Level) The output is true when the speed feedback is properly tracking
speed dev low
the speed reference. The speed deviation needs to be within a user-defined range for a userdefined period of time. (Speed Dev. = reference - feedback)
(Speed Reference Release) The output is true when the flux is confirmed and drive is NOT in
speed ref rls
DC injection.
(Speed Regulator Release) The output is true when the flux is confirmed at 75% and brake is
speed reg rls
commanded to be picked (if used)
(Low Voltage Fault) The output is true when the DC bus voltage drops below the user specified
undervolt flt
percent of the input line-to-line voltage.
up to speed
(Up to Speed) The output is true when the motor speed is above the user specified speed
(Under Voltage Alarm) The output is true when the DC bus voltage drops below the user
uv alarm
specified percent of the input line-to-line voltage.
(Zero Speed) The output is true when the motor speed is below the user specified speed for
zero speed
the user specified time.
Table 10: Logic Outputs C3 Submenu
71
Quattro DC Analog Outputs C4
Analog Outputs C4 submenu
With a gain of 1.0 and an offset of 0.0, 10V will
indicate 100% or full value based on
programmed values. For example, with the
above scenario of a gain of 1.0 and an offset of
0.0, a 10V signal an Analog Output set to arm
current would indicate 100% of rated current.
Whereas a 0V signal on the same Analog
Output would indicate 0% of rated current.
Any value over 100% will cause the analog
channel to saturate.
Parameter
Description
Default
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
analog output #1
analog output #2
SPEED REF
SPEED FEEDBK
choices
analog addr2
analog addr3
arb state
arm current
arm voltage
aux torq cmd
bus voltage
est motor spd
field current
iarm error
ls pwr input
pretorque ref
Motor overload
motor mode
spd rg tq cmd
speed command
speed error
speed feedbk
speed ref
tach rate cmd
tach speed
torque ref
description
(Analog Address 2) Ability to view hex monitor functions via the
analog outputs. Choosing this function will display the hex monitor
value of ADDR2& (U8).
(Analog Address 3) Ability to view hex monitor functions via the
analog outputs. Choosing this function will display the hex monitor
value of ADDR3& (U8).
(ARB State) Ability to view which section ARB Mode is in while
setting up ARB. For further information, see Anti-Rollback on page
114.
(Motor Armature Current) Measured motor armature current
(Motor Armature Voltage) Measured motor armature voltage
(Auxiliary Torque Command) Additional torque command from
auxiliary source
(DC Bus Voltage Output) Measured DC bus voltage
(Estimated Motor Speed) Estimated speed of the motor
(Motor Field Current) Measured motor field current
(Armature Current Error) Measures the difference between the
reference current and the measured current
(Line Side Power Input) Estimated power transfer to and from the
AC Line. Value is positive when drive is pulling power from the line
and negative when drive is delivering power back to the line.
(PreTorque Reference) Pre-torque reference
0 – 10V, when the number reaches 10V the drive will shut down
and declare the fault.
(Motor Mode) Voltage level switches to indicate the mode the
current regulator is operating in.
1) Forward motoring (~ 9.7V)
2) Forward regeneration (high CEMF) (~ 4.4V)
3) Forward plugging (regeneration at low CEMF) (~ 1.3V)
4) Reverse plugging (regeneration at low CEMF) (~ -1.3V)
5) Reverse regeneration (high CEMF) (~ -9.7V)
6) Reverse motoring (~ -4.4V)
(Speed Regulator Torque Command) Torque command from
speed regulator
(Speed Command) Speed command before S-Curve
(Speed Error) Speed reference minus speed feedback
(Speed Feedback) Speed feedback used by speed regulator
(Speed Reference) Speed reference after S-Curve
(Tachometer Rate Command) Torque command from tach rate
gain function
(Tachometer / Encoder Speed) Bi-directional signal representing
velocity measured by the encoder.
(Torque Reference) Torque reference used by vector control
Table 11: Analog Outputs C4 Submenu
72
Hidden
Item
Y
Y
Run
lock
out
N
N
D/A units
none
none
% rated current
% of rated volts
% rated torque
% of peak in
RPM
% of rated (Full Field)
Amps
kW
% base torque
0 – 100%
-
% base torque
% rated speed
% rated speed
% rated speed
% rated speed
% base torque
ft/min or m/sec
% base torque
Quattro DC Display Data D0 Menu
Display D0 menu
Elevator Data D1 submenu
Parameter
SPEED
COMMAND
SPEED
REFERENCE
SPEED
FEEDBACK
MOTOR SPEED
SPEED ERROR
Description
(Speed Command) Monitors the speed command before the
speed reference generator (input to the S-Curve). This command
comes from either multi-step references, speed command from
analog channel, or the serial channel.
(Speed Reference) Monitors the speed reference being used by
the drive. This is the speed command after passing through the
speed reference generator (which uses a S-Curve).
(Speed Feedback) Monitors the speed feedback coming from the
encoder. It is based on contract speed, motor rpm and encoder
pulses per revolution. The drive converts from motor RPM to
linear speed using the relationship between the CONTRACT CAR
SPD (A1) and CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameters.
(Motor Speed) Monitors the measured speed feedback coming
from the encoder. ENCODER PULSES (A1) calibrates this
parameter.
(Speed Error) Monitors the speed error between the speed
reference and the speed feedback. It is equal to the following
equation:
 speed

 reference
  speed
  
  feedback
 speed
 
error

(Pre-Torque Reference) Monitors the pre torque reference,
coming from either analog channel #2 or the serial channel.
(Pre-Torque Last Value) Displays the pre-torque used for the
PRE-TORQ LAST
previous run.
EXT-TORQUE
(External Torque Command) Monitors the Torque Feed Forward
CMD
Command when used.
(Speed Regulator Torque Command) Monitors the speed
regulator’s torque command. This is the torque command before
SPD REG TORQ
it passes through the tach rate gain function or the auxiliary torque
CMD
command. It is the torque required for the motor to follow the
speed reference.
(Tachometer Rate Command) Monitors the torque command from
TACH RATE CMD
the tach rate gain function, (if used).
AUX TORQUE
(Auxiliary Torque Command) Monitors the feedforward torque
CMD
command from auxiliary source, when used.
EST INERTIA
(Estimated Inertia) Estimated elevator system inertia.
(Serial Communications Status)
PRE-TORQUE
REF
Units
Hidden
Item
ft/min or m/s
N
ft/min or m/s
N
ft/min or m/s
N
RPM
N
ft/min or m/s
N
% rated
torque
% rated
torque
% of rated
current
% rated
torque
% rated
torque
% rated
torque
seconds
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
RX COM STATUS
D1 00-0000-0000-0000
RX COM STATUS
(continued on
next page)
Bit 13
Bit Severity
0 Info
1
Info
2
Fatal
3
Info /
Fatal
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Bit 0
Name Description/Reason
RX_INVALID_SETUP_ID Invalid setup id on
setup message
RX_SETUP_IN_RUN A setup message to write
was received while the serial run bit was set.
RX_TIMEOUT A COMM Fault was declared
because of a communication time-out.
RX_INVALID_CHECKSUM If COMM FAULT
was declared because of bad message
checksums.
73
1=true
0=false
N
Quattro DC Display Data D0 Menu
Parameter
Description
Name Description/Reason
RX_INVALID_MESSAGE Invalid header
character in message.
5 Info
RX_FIFO_OVERRUN Overflow has occurred.
6 Info
RX_INVALID_RUN_ID Set if the Cmd_Id sent in
the RUN MESSAGE is not in range.
RX_INVALID_MONITOR_ID
7 Info
(Not available in Mode 2) Set if the Monitor_Id
received in the run message is not in range.
8 Info
RX_INVALID_FAULT_ID Set if the Fault_Id sent
in the setup message is not in range.
9 Info
RX_FAULT_DETECTED COMM FAULT has
RX COM STATUS
been detected
(continued)
10 Info
Fault_Mode_1
(Not available in Mode 1) Immediate Shutdown
Mode
11 Info
Fault_Mode_2
(Not available in Mode 1)
Run Removal Shutdown Mode
12 Info
Fault_Mode_3
(Not available in Mode 1)
Rescue Shutdown Mode
13
N/a
14
N/a
15 Fatal
RX_COMM_FAULT COMM FAULT has been
declared by the drive
(Serial communication error counter) This function will monitor
RX Error Count
invalid serial messages and increase the count per invalid
messages. This is used as a diagnostic tool.
(Logic Outputs Status) This display shows the condition of the
logic outputs. (1=true 0=false)
Units
Hidden
Item
1=true
0=false
N
Count
N
1=true
0=false
N
1=true
0=false
N
Bit Severity
4 Info
LOGIC OUTPUTS
D1 000-0000-0000
LOGIC OUTPUTS
Relay output 2
Logic output 1
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Relay output 1
Logic output 7
Solid State Relay 1
Solid State Relay 2
(Logic Inputs Status) This display shows the condition of the logic
inputs. (1=true 0=false)
LOGIC INPUTS
D1
0-0000-0000
LOGIC INPUTS
Logic
RUN/FAULT
MENU
InputSUB
9DATA
ENT
74
Logic Input 1
Quattro DC Display Data D0 Menu
Parameter
Description
Units
Hidden
Item
1=true
0=false
N
(Serial Communications Logic Inputs)
RX LOGIC INPUT
D1 0000-0000-0000
Bit
RX LOGIC INPUT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
11 DATA ENT
Bit 0
Bit Name Description/Reason
0 AUX_RUN_BIT Serial Run Command bit from car controller
AUX_FLT_RST_REQ_BIT Serial Fault Reset Request from
1
car controller
AUX_PT_CLK_BIT Serial Pre-Torque Latch Clock Bit from
2
car controller
AUX_LOW_GAIN_BIT Serial Low PI Gain Control Bit from
3
car controller
AUX_RAMP_DWN_EN_BIT Serial Ramp Down Enable Bit
4
from car controller
AUX_BRAKE_PICK_BIT Serial Brake Pick Command Bit
5
from car controller
AUX_BRAKE_HOLD_BIT Serial Brake Hold Command Bit
6
from car controller
AUX_OSPD_TST_BIT Serial Overspeed Test Request Bit
7 from car controller
8 AUX_LBEF_BIT Serial Field Enable Bit from car controller
AUX_FLD_STANDBY_ENABLE_BIT Serial Field Standby
9 enabled (field goes from full field to standby field using
STNDBY FLD TIME (A1)) from car controller
AUX_FULL_FIELD_BIT Serial Full Field Bit with auto field
10
weakening when appropriate
11 N/A
Table 12: Elevator Display Data D1 Submenu
75
Quattro DC Display Data D0 Menu
MS Power Data D2 submenu
Parameter
Description
Units
ARM CURRENT
FIELD CURRENT
ARM VOLTAGE
MS BUS
VOLTAGE
(Armature Current) Measured motor armature current
(Field Current) Measured motor field current
(Armature Voltage) Measured motor armature voltage
amps
volts
volts
Hidden
Item
N
N
N
(Motor Side Bus Voltage) Measured Motor Side DC bus voltage
volts
N
none
Y
%
N
m/sec
N
m/sec
N
none
N
none
N
°C
N
°C
N
°C
N
°C
N
amps
N
mH
N
%
N
ohm
N
ohm
N
sec
N
MOTOR MODE
TORQUE REF
EST SPD FDBK
ENCODER
SPEED
ANALOG
ADDESS2
ANALOG
ADDESS3
DS MODULE
TEMP
LS MODULE
TEMP
HIGHEST TEMP
FIELD IGBT
TEMP
(Motor Mode) Tells the user if the motor is motoring, regening, CEMF
braking, or idle.
(Torque Reference) This is the output of the speed regulator plus any
torque feed forwards from the car controller
(Estimated Speed Feedback) Estimated speed based on voltage
readings. When running the CEMF regulator, the EST SPD FDBK will
equal the speed reference. When running in tach feedback mode, EST
SPD FDBK will estimate the speed based on voltages.
(Encoder Speed) Give the speed of the encoder in meters / second.
(Analog Address 2) Gives the Hex Monitor Address of the hex monitor in
ADDR2& (U8).
(Analog Address 3) Gives the Hex Monitor Address of the hex monitor in
ADDR3& (U8).
(Drive Side Module Temperature) Indicates the hottest of the drive side
IGBT module.
(Line Side Module Temperature) Indicates the hottest of the line side
converter IGBT module temperature.
(Highest Measured Temperature) Indicates the hottest of the drive side
IGBT module and the line side IGBT module and the Field IGBT.
(Field IGBT Temperature) Monitors temperature of IGBT module that
controls motor field current as indicated by an internal thermistor.
Reported in degrees C.
ARMATURE CUR
(Armature Current Error) Measured Motor Armature Current in amperes.
ERR
(Auto-tune Measured Armature Inductance) Measured Motor Armature
AUTO MEAS
Inductance as calculated by the auto-tune (in GAIN SELECTION (A4))
ARM L
after an auto-tune has been done.
(Auto-tune measured Armature IR Drop) Adjusts motor armature current
AUTO MEAS
regulator for expected current x resistance voltage drop of motor
IRDROP
armature circuit at rated current. Includes motor armature, inter-poles
and wiring resistance.
(Auto-tune Measured Armature Resistance) Measured Motor Armature
AUTO MEAS
Resistance as calculated by the auto-tune (in GAIN SELECTION (A4))
ARM R
after an auto-tune has been done.
(Auto-tune Measured Field Resistance) Measured Field Resistance as
AUTO FIELD RES calculated by the auto-tune (in GAIN SELECTION (A4)) after an autotune has been done.
(Auto-tune Measured Field Time Constant) Measured Field Time
AUTO FIELD TC Constant as calculated by the auto-tune (in GAIN SELECTION (A4))
after an auto-tune has been done.
Table 13: MS Power Data D2 Submenu
76
Quattro DC Display Data D0 Menu
LS Power Data D3 submenu
Parameter
Description
(Line Side Power Input) Estimated power transfer to and from the AC
Line. Value is positive when drive is pulling power from the line, and
negative when drive is delivering power back to the line.
(DC Bus Voltage) Measured DC Bus voltage as seen by the line side
DC BUS VOLTS
controller.
(DC Bus Voltage Reference) Calculated applied DC Bus Voltage
DC BUS VOLTS
reference as the peak of the AC line voltage plus the amount to boost.
REF
For more information, see Line Side Power Convert A5 Submenu on
page 49.
(Line Side Overload) Reports active condition of Line Side overload
accumulator during operation. If this parameter reaches 100%, the
LS OVERLOAD
Line Side Overload faults will occur. This overload is provided for
Quattro equipment protection.
LS INPUT
(Line Side Input Current) Measured input line current as the average
CURRENT
of the three phases.
(Line Side D Axis Current) Percent of rated current in the D axis.
LS D AXIS I
Note: This is reactive power producing current.
(Line Side Q Axis Current) Percent of rated current in the Q axis.
LS Q AXIS I
Note: This is power producing current.
(Line Side D Axis Voltage) Percent of rated voltage in the Q axis.
LS D AXIS V
Note: This is reactive power producing voltage.
(Line Side Q Axis Voltage) Percent of rated voltage in the Q axis.
LS Q AXIS V
Note: This is power-producing voltage.
(Input Frequency) Measured input line frequency. Note, this value will
INPUT HZ
read 55Hz until the drive is able to measure true input frequency.
(Input Voltage A-B Phase) Measured input line-to-line voltage phase
INPUT Vab
A-B.
(Input Voltage C-A Phase) Measured input line-to-line voltage phase
INPUT Vca
C-A.
(Line Side Module Temp) Indicates the hottest of the line side
LS MODULE TEMP
converters IGBT modules.
LS PWR INPUT
Table 14: LS Power Data D3 Submenu
77
Units
Hidden
Item
kW
N
Volts
N
Volts
N
%
N
Amps
N
%
N
%
N
%
N
%
N
Hz
N
Volts
N
Volts
N
°C
N
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
Utility U0 menu
U0
Parameter
Description
U1
PASSWORD
For more information, see PASSWORD on page 79.
Allows the user to enter in a
012345
password
Used to change the
established password
Used to enable and disable
disabled
DISABLED
password lockout
enabled
For more information, see HIDDEN ITEMS on page 79.
Selects if the “hidden”
enabled
parameters will be displayed ENABLED
disabled
on the Digital Operator.
For more information, see UNITS on page 79.
Choose either Metric units or
english
standard English
ENGLISH
metric
measurements units
For more information, see OVERSPEED TEST on page 79.
Allows for Overspeed Test to
no
be enabled via the digital
NO
yes
operator
For more information, see RESTORE DFLTS on page 80.
Resets all parameters in the A1, A2, A3, A4, C1, C2, C3, and
C4 Submenus. Also resets the following parameters in the A6
submenu: FLUX CONFIRM LEV, TACH VOLT SENSE, TACH
SPEED SENSE, OVLD START LEVEL, and OVLD TIME
OUT.
Resets the parameter GAIN SELECTION (A4) to its default
value.
Resets the parameters in A5 submenu to default values. Also
reset GAIN SELECTION (A4).
For more information, see MS DRIVE INFO on page 81.
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
For more information, see LS DRIVE INFO on page 83.
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
Read Only Data
For more information see HEX MONITOR on page 83.
ENTER PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD
U2
PASSWORD
LOCKOUT
HIDDEN ITEMS
HIDDEN ITEMS
U3
UNITS
UNITS SELECTION
U4
OVRSPEED TEST
OVERSPEED TEST?
U5
RESTORE DFLTS
RESTORE DRIVE
DEFAULTS?
U6
U7
U8
RESTORE MOTOR
DEFAULTS?
RESTORE UTILITY
DEFAULTS
MS DRIVE INFO
MS TYPE
MS PLATFORM
FIELD MODULE
MS CODE VERSION
MS S/W DATE
MS S/W TIME
MS PIB MODULE
MS FPGA REV
MS CUBE ID
LS DRIVE INFO
LS TYPE
LS CODE VERSION
LS S/W DATE
LS S/W TIME
LS FPGA REV
LS CUBE ID
HEX MONITOR
Addr1
Addr2&
Addr3&
Default
78
Choices
Run
Hidden
lock
Item
out
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
ENTER PASSWORD Screen
This screen allows the user to enter in a
password. A valid password must be entered
before enabling or disabling the password
lockout or changing to a new password.
NEW PASSWORD Screen
This screen is used to change the established
password.
NOTE: Remember that a valid password must
be entered at the ENTER PASSWORD screen
before the established password can be
changed.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Screen
This screen is used to enable and disable
password lockout. The factory default for
password lockout is DISABLED.
NOTE: Remember that a valid password must
be entered at the ENTER PASSWORD screen
before the password lockout condition can be
changed.
Detailed Description
PASSWORD
(Password Function)
The following three different screens are used
by the password function:
 ENTER PASSWORD
 NEW PASSWORD
 PASSWORD LOCKOUT
Password Function
The password function allows the user to
select a six-digit number for a password. The
password function allows the user to lockout
changes to the parameters until a valid
password is entered.
And with the password lockout enabled, all
parameters and display values will be able to
be viewed but no changes to the parameters
will be allowed until a correct password is
entered.
Parameter Protection
If the password lockout is enabled, the
following message will appear on the display
when attempting to change a parameter.
HIDDEN ITEMS
(Hidden Items Function)
The HIDDEN ITEMS sub-menu allows the user
to select whether or not “hidden” parameters
will be displayed on the Digital Operator.
There are two types of parameters, standard
and hidden. Standard parameters are
available at all times. Hidden parameters are
available only if activated. The default for this
function is ENABLED (meaning the hidden
parameters are visible).
Password
Protected
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
In order to change a parameter after password
lockout has been enabled, the following two
steps must be followed in the PASSWORD
sub-menu:
1) A valid password must be entered in the
ENTER PASSWORD screen.
2) The password lockout must be DISABLED
in the PASSWORD LOCKOUT screen.
PASSWORD Sub-menu Protection
The following message will appear when in the
PASSWORD sub-menu, if you are trying to:
 Enable or disable the password lockout
without a valid password being entered.
 Enter a new password without a valid
password being entered.
UNITS
(Units Selection Function)
When the UNITS SELECTION sub-menu is
displayed, the user can choose either Metric
units or Standard English measurements units
for use by the drive’s parameters.
IMPORTANT
The unit’s selection must be made before
entering any setting values into the
parameters. The user cannot toggle between
units after drive has been programmed.
OVERSPEED TEST
(Overspeed Test Function)
The speed command is normally limited by
Overspeed Level parameter (OVERSPEED
LEVEL(A1)), which is set as a percentage of
the contract speed (100% to 150%). But in
order to allow overspeed tests during elevator
inspections, a means is provided to multiply
the speed command by the Overspeed
Multiplier parameter (OVERSPEED
MULT(A1)).
PLEASE ENTER
PASSWORD FIRST
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
79
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
An overspeed test can be initiated by:
 an external logic input
 the serial channel
 directly from the digital operator
Overspeed Test via Logic Input
The external logic input can be used by:
 setting the Overspeed Test Source
parameter to external tb1.
 defining a logic input terminal to ospd test src
NOTE: This logic input requires a transition
from false to true to be recognized - this
prevents the overspeed function from being
permanently enabled if left in the true state.
Overspeed Test via Serial Channel
The serial channel can be used by setting
Overspeed Test Source (C1) parameter to
serial.
Overspeed Test via Operator
The Digital Operator can also initiate the
overspeed test by performing the following:

The value in the Overspeed Mult (A1)
parameter is applied to the speed reference
and the overspeed level, so that the elevator
can be operated at greater than contract speed
and not trip on an Overspeed Fault.
When the Run command is remove after the
overspeed test, overspeed test reverts back to
its default of NO. In order to run another
overspeed test via the Digital Operator, the
above steps must be repeated again.
RESTORE DFLTS
(Restore Parameter Defaults)
Three different functions are included in this
sub-menu.
Restore Drive Defaults
This function resets parameters in DRIVE A1
submenu, S-CURVES A2 submenu,
MULTISTEP REF A3 submenu, MS PWR
CONVERT A4 submenu and CONFIGURE C0
menu to their default values. Also resets the
following parameters in the A6 submenu:
FLUX CONFIRM LEV, TACH VOLT SENSE,
TACH SPEED SENSE, OVLD START LEVEL,
and OVLD TIME OUT.
The following shows how to restore the drive
defaults:
While the Digital Operator display shows
UTILITY U0
OVRSPEED TEST U4
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RESTORE DRIVE
U4
DEFAULTS?
Press the ENTER key. The sub-menu LED will
turn on, and the Digital Operator will display:
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the enter key
OVERSPEED TEST?
U4
NO
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT

Press the ENTER key again. The sub
menu LED will go out and data ent LED
will turn on.

Press the up arrow or down arrow key and
the display will change to:
PRESS ENTER TO
CONFIRM REQUEST
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the enter key again
DEFAULT RESTORED
PUSH ANY KEY
OVERSPEED TEST?
U4
YES
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT

If the esc key is pressed, instead the reset
action will be aborted
Press the ENTER key to begin the
overspeed test.
80
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
Restore Utility Defaults
This function resets the parameters in the LS
PWR CONVERT (A5) submenu to the
defaults. The following shows how to restore
the utility defaults:
NO ACTION TAKEN
PUSH ANY KEY
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RESTORE UTILITY
U5 DEFAULTS?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Restore Motor Defaults
The following shows how to restore the motor
defaults:
Press the enter key
PRESS ENTER TO
CONFIRM REQUEST
RESTORE MOTOR
U5 DEFAULTS?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the enter key again
Press the enter key
DEFAULT RESTORED
PUSH ANY KEY
PRESS ENTER TO
CONFIRM REQUEST
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
If the esc key is pressed, instead the reset
action will be aborted
Press the enter key again
DEFAULT RESTORED
PUSH ANY KEY
NO ACTION TAKEN
PUSH ANY KEY
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
If the esc key is pressed, instead the reset
action will be aborted
MS DRIVE INFO
(Motor Side Drive Information)
Six different screens are included in this submenu, each display an identification number.
MS TYPE Screen
Shows the type of drive the software is
installed in:
NO ACTION TAKEN
PUSH ANY KEY
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
MS TYPE
U6 STD. DC Drv.
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
81
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
MS PLATFORM
Shows the platform of the drive. This display
should correspond with the selection of J1
jumper on the Product Interface Board. See
Testpoints (Product Interface Board – Other)
on page 120.
MS S/W TIME Screen
Displays the time of the released motor side
code version.
U6
MS PLATFORM
U6 Q2B Series
MS S/W TIME
09:50:19
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
MS PIB MODULE Screen
Gives the revision number for the motor side
product interface board. When 2 is displayed,
the product interface board is a -0010 or -0020
version. When 3 is displayed, the product
interface board is a -0030 and is capable of
EN81-1 Base Enable functionality.
Field Module
Gives the version of field module detected by
the code.
FIELD MODULE
U6 40 AMP H VLT
U6
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
MS PIB MODULE
3
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
MS CODE VERSION
Shows the version of code located in the Motor
Side portion of the drive.
MS FPGA REVISION Screen
Gives the revision number for the motor side
FPGA.
MS CODE VERSION
U6 A4420-DU0214
MS FPGA Revision
U6
34
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
MS S/W DATE Screen
Gives the date of the released motor side code
version.
MS CUBE ID Screen
Displays the cube identification number of the
drive. This number identifies specific drive
ratings related to detected equipment
hardware.
Ampere
Model
Cube
Rating of drive Number
ID #
125A
QDC125156
150A
QDC150158
200A
QDC200168
250A
QDC250170
300A
QDC300172
MS S/W DATE
U6 May 27 2011
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
82
Quattro DC Utility U0 Menu
LS FPGA REV Screen
Gives the revision number for the Line side
FPGA.
LS DRIVE INFO
(Drive Information)
Six different screens are included in this submenu, each display an identification number.
LS TYPE Screen
Shows the type of drive the software is
installed in:
U7
LS FPGA REV
34
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
U7
LS TYPE
GENERIC
LS CUBE ID Screen
Displays the cube identification number of the
drive. This number identifies specific drive
ratings related to detected equipment
hardware.
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
LS CODE VERSION
Shows the version of code located in the Line
Side portion of the drive.
U7
LS CODE VERSION
U7 A4410-L0202
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Ampere
Rating of drive
125A
150A
200A
250A
300A
LS S/W DATE Screen
Gives the date of the released Line side code
version.
U7
Model
Number
QDC125QDC150QDC200QDC250QDC300-
Cube
ID #
155
157
167
169
171
LS S/W DATE
Mar 2 2010
HEX MONITOR
(Hex Monitor)
The hex monitor was designed for fault and
parameter diagnostics. It is intended for use
by Magnetek personnel only. The Hex Monitor
contains 3 addresses for viewing. Address 1
may only be displayed in U8, whereas Address
2 and Address 3 may be viewed in either U8,
or D1, or may be programmed to an analog
output.
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
LS S/W TIME Screen
Displays the time of the released Line side
code version.
U7
LS CUBE ID
157
LS S/W TIME
13:12:06
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
83
Quattro DC Fault F0 Menu
Fault F0 menu
This menu also allows for clearing of active
faults in order to get the drive ready to return to
operation after a fault shutdown.
The FAULTS F0 menu does not access
settable parameters; instead, it provides a
means of examining the drive’s active faults
and the fault history.
F0
Parameter
F1
ACTIVE FAULTS
DISPLAY ACTIVE
FAULTS?
RESET ACTIVE
FAULTS?
FAULT HISTORY
DISPLAY FAULT
HISTORY?
CLEAR FAULT
HISTORY?
DISPLAY FAULT
COUNTERS?
F2
Description
Contains a list of the active faults
Allows for reset of active faults
Contains a list of up to the last sixteen faults
Allows for the clearing of the fault history and fault counters
Contains list of faults and the number of times they
occurred
Detailed Descriptions
Hidden
Item
Run
lock
out
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
operator, regardless of the setting of the Fault
Reset Source parameter (see User Switches
C1 submenu on page 56)
While the Digital Operator display shows:
ACTIVE FAULTS
(Active Faults)
This sub-menu contains a list of the active
faults. This sub-menu also allows the user to
reset the active faults.
Active Faults List
The active fault list displays and records the
active faults. The faults will remain on the fault
list until a fault reset is initiated.
FAULTS F0
ACTIVE FAULTS F1
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the ENTER key. The sub-menu LED
will turn ON, and the Digital Operator will
display:
DISPLAY ACTIVE
F1
FAULTS?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the enter key to enter the active fault list.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the active faults.
F1
RESET ACTIVE
FAULTS?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the ENTER key again to begin the fault
reset procedure. The sub-menu LED will go
out and the data ent LED will turn on.
ACTIVE FAULTS
F1 CHARGE FAULT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RESET ISSUED
PUSH ANY KEY
Resetting Active Faults
The Reset Active Faults function allows the
user to initiate a fault reset via the digital
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
84
Quattro DC Fault F0 Menu
FAULT HISTORY
(Fault History)
This sub-menu contains a list of up to the last
sixteen faults.
NOTE: The fault history is not affected by the
fault reset or a power loss. The fault history
can only be cleared by a function in this submenu.
Fault History
All faults are placed in the fault history. The
fault history displays the last 16 faults that
have occurred and a time stamp indicating
when each happened.
F2
Press the enter key to enter the fault history.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the faults.
01 CHARGE FAULT
F2
0.0097 hrs
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Clearing Fault History
The fault history is not affected by the fault
reset or a power loss. The fault history can
only be cleared via the user function described
below. Clearing the Fault History will also
clear the Fault Counters.
Enter the submenu in F2 by pressing the
ENTER key. The sub-menu LED will turn ON,
and the Digital Operator will display:
DISPLAY FAULT
HISTORY?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the enter key to enter the fault history.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll
through the faults.
F2
CLEAR FAULT
HISTORY?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
01 CHARGE FAULT
F2
0.0097 hrs

RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the ENTER key again to begin the
fault reset procedure.
The active faults must be cleared in order to
clear the fault history. If not the following
message will appear when trying to clear the
fault history.
FAULT COUNTERS
(Fault Counters)
This sub-menu contains a list of all the faults
and the numbers of times they occurred.
NOTE: The fault counters list is not affected by
the fault reset or a power loss. The fault
counters can only be cleared by a clear fault
history
Fault Counter
All faults possible are located in the Fault
Counter. The fault counter shows each fault
and the number of times it occurred until
cleared by the Clear Fault History function.
RST FAULTS FIRST
PUSH ANY KEY
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
The sub-menu LED will go out and the data
ent LED will turn on.
RESET ISSUED
PUSH ANY KEY
F2
DISPLAY FAULT
COUNTERS?
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
85
Quattro DC Maintenance
Maintenance
WARNING
Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive
circuits even with drive circuit breaker in off
position. NEVER attempt preventive
maintenance unless incoming power and
control power is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out.
There are two separate areas for the DC Bus
Charge light. One charge light is located on
the control panel in the lower right hand
corner. Two additional charge lights are
located on the DC Bus Board. The turn off
voltage for the DC Bus Board Charge lights
(DS1 and DS2) is 2V.
Maintenance Overview
Preventive maintenance is primarily a matter of
routine inspection and cleaning. The most
important maintenance factors are the
following:
Is there sufficient airflow to cool the drive?
Has vibration loosened any connections?
The Drive needs to have sufficient air flow for
long, reliable operation. Accumulated dust and
dirt accumulation can reduce airflow and cause
the heat sinks to overheat. The heat sinks can
be kept clean by brushing, while using a
vacuum cleaner.
Drive Servicing
Periodically, check air filters on enclosure
doors, clean if dirty and replace as necessary.
Remember when servicing the Drive:
Hazardous voltages may exist in the drive
circuits even with drive circuit breaker in off
position.
Periodically, clean the cooling fans to prevent
dirt buildup. At the same time, check that the
impellers are free and not binding in the
housing.
IMPORTANT
Use extreme caution: Do not touch any circuit
board, the drive, or motor electrical
connections without making sure that the unit
is properly grounded and that no high voltage
is present.
NEVER attempt maintenance unless the
incoming three phase power and control power
is disconnected and locked out.
Also, ensure the DC Bus charge light is out,
verify with a voltmeter that no voltage exists
between the (+) and (-) terminals.
Periodically, check all mounting and electrical
connections. Any loose hardware should be
tightened.
86
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
not be able to run until all active faults are
cleared.
Troubleshooting
Faults and Alarms
Two classes of warnings are reported by the
Drive; these are identified as Faults and
Alarms.
An Alarm is a drive condition worth noting that
may or may not require immediate attention,
but the condition is not severe enough to stop
operating the drive. In many cases, Alarms
will automatically clear when the condition
returns to normal or when the drive is stopped
and restarted.
Faults and Fault Annunciation
A Fault is a severe failure condition that will
stop a drive if it has been running and prevent
the drive from starting as long as it is present.
All faults require some type of action by the
user to clear.
There are four means of fault annunciation:
1. A priority message will be seen on the
Digital Operator:
ACTIVE FAULTS
F1 CHARGE FAULT
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
3. The fault will be placed on the fault history.
The fault history displays the last 16 faults and
a time stamp indicating when each happened.
The fault history IS NOT affected by an active
fault reset or a power loss. The fault history
can be cleared via a user-initiated function.
01 CHARGE FAULT
F2
0.0097 hrs
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
4. The user can assign a fault to an external
logic output. Refer to configuration submenu
item C3.
FAULT!
CHARGE FAULT
Fault Clearing
Performing a fault reset can clear most faults.
The fault reset can be initiated by:
 an external logic input
 the serial channel
 automatically by the drive
 manually by the digital operator
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
A priority message will overwrite what ever is
currently displayed. The user can clear this
message by pressing any key on the Digital
Operator keypad. If another fault is present,
the next fault will appear as a priority message.
CAUTION
If the run signal is asserted at the time of a
fault reset, the drive could immediately go into
a run state. However, if the auto-fault reset
function is enabled (FAULT RESET
SRC(C1)=automatic) then the run command
needs to be cycled.
NOTE: Clearing the fault priority message
from the display DOES NOT clear the fault
from the active fault list. The faults must be
cleared by a fault reset before the drive will
run. Setting PRIORITY MESSAGE (C1) to
DISABLE can disable priority Messages.
2. The fault will be placed on the active fault
list which will record and display currently
active faults. The faults will remain on the fault
list until an active fault reset is initiated. The
drive will
87
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Drive Faults, Alarms, and operator messages along with possible causes and corrective actions are
listed below.
Note:
 fault - a severe failure that will stop a drive if it has been running and prevent the drive from
starting as long as it is present. All faults require some type of action by the user to clear.
 alarm - only meant for annunciation. It will NOT stop the operation of the drive or prevent the
drive from operating.
 operator message - operator communications message. It will NOT stop the operation of the
drive or prevent the drive from operating.
Name
Bad Srl Chksm
(alarm)
Description
The drive is being operated by
serial the following has
occurred:
Bad message checksum
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Bad Serial Connection
 Remove and re-seat the RS-422 serial cable
 Check car controller serial driver board
 Check the serial cable connected to the drive’s
RS-422 port
 The Customer I/O PCB on the drive may need
to be replaced
 Possible problem with car controller serial
communication
Grounding Issue
 Check grounding between car controller and
drive
 Noise on serial channel due to the cable
The contact between TB2-7
Base Enable
Check Connections
and TB2-14 on the customer
 Verify external contact between TB2-7 and
Opnd
TB2-14 is closed
interface board has opened
 Verify +24VDC is present on pin TB2-7
 Reconnect cable from A6JC3 to A4JP9
BBlock Not Avail Base Block is not available with Check Connections
version of Product Interface
 Verify external contact between TB2-7 and
(alarm)
TB2-14 is closed
Board
 If it is desired to use Base Block, upgrade
Product Interface board to version -0030
 Reconnect cable from A6JC3 to A4JP9
Bridge Ground A ground fault has been
Check Motor Wiring
detected by the hardware on
 Check motor wiring and motor for insulation
the motor side. The current
breakdown or unintentional contact to other
going to A1 armature motor
objects
lead does not match the
 Ensure proper connection of shield drain wires
current returning from the
to chassis
motor armature lead A2.
Check Connections
 Possibly missing connector on one of the
current sensors of the motor side bridge
 Bad Current Sensor
88
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Brk Hold Flt
Brk Pick Flt
Check Setup
Description
The brake hold command and
the brake feedback did not
match for the time specified
with Brake Hold Time (A1)
parameter.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameter Settings
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
the correct TB1 terminal and set to MECH
BRK HOLD (C2)
 Check BRAKE HOLD SRC (C1) parameter for
the correct source of brake pick feedback
 Check BRAKE HOLD TIME (A1) parameter for
the correct brake hold time
 Wrong assignment of Normally Closed contact
mask (C2)
 Check BRK HOLD FLT ENA (C1)
Verify Brake Settings
 If drive is controlling brake, verify a logic
output is set to BRAKE HOLD (C3)
 Check for an open circuit between the brake
pick pilot relay and the logic output assigned
to brake pick control
Mechanical Brake Hold Signal Wiring
 Defective Brake Hold Coil
 Defective Brake Hold Auxiliary contactor used
for sensing the brake state
If nuisance fault, the fault can be disabled by
BRK HOLD FLT ENA (C1) parameter.
The brake pick command and Check Parameter Settings
the brake feedback did not
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
match for the time specified
the correct TB1 terminal and set to MECH
with Brake Pick Time
BRK PICK (C2)
parameter.
 Check BRAKE PICK SRC (C1) parameter for
the correct source of brake pick feedback
 Check BRAKE PICK TIME (A1) parameter for
the correct brake hold time
 Wrong assignment of Normally Closed contact
mask (C2)
 Increase BRAKE PICK TIME (A1)
Verify Brake Settings
 If drive is controlling brake, verify a logic
output is set to BRAKE PICK (C3)
 Check for an open circuit between the brake
pick pilot relay and the logic output assigned
to brake pick control
Mechanical Brake Pick Signal Wiring
 Defective Brake Pick Coil
 Defective Brake Pick Auxiliary contactor used
for sensing the brake state
If nuisance fault, the fault can be disabled by BRK
PICK FLT ENA (C1) parameter.
This fault is logged when a new Invalid Parameter Setup
program is loaded to the motor This is an advisory fault indicating that the user
side processor, and the default should verify the drive’s parameters or Upload a
data is loaded for the
valid parameter set using Magnetek Explorer
parameter values.
89
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Comm Fault
Comm Fault
Invalid
Checksum
(operator)
Comm Fault No
Drv Handshake
(operator)
Contactor Flt
Cube data Flt
Cube ID Fault
Description
The drive is being operated by
serial communications and one
of the following has occurred:
Communication time-out – The
drive did not receive a valid
run-time message within 40ms
while running
Bad message checksum –
Drive has detected 3
consecutive bad message
checksums
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Bad Serial Connection
 Remove and re-seat the RS-422 serial cable
 Check car controller serial driver board
 Check the serial cable connected to the drive’s
RS-422 port
 The Customer I/O PCB on the drive may need
to be replaced
 Possible problem with car controller serial
communication
Grounding Issue
 Check grounding between car controller and
drive
 Noise on serial channel due to the cable
The operator received four
Noise or Bad Connector Connection
consecutive invalid messages  Remove and re-seat the operator in its cradle
 If re-seating the operator did not work, the
operator or the drive’s control board may need
to be replaced
The operator lost
Bad Connector Connection
communications with the
 Remove and re-seat the operator in its cradle
drive’s control board.
 If re-seating the operator did not work, the
operator or the drive’s control board may need
to be replaced
Contactor confirm on TB1-1 is Check parameter settings and contactor
opened when the regulator
 Check CONTACT FLT TIME (A1) parameter
release is active and the speed
for the correct contactor fault time.
reference is greater than 20%  Verify wiring to logic input 1 (CONTACT
of contract speed.
CFIRM (C2)) is correct and Logic Input 1 (C2)
is set to CONTACT CFIRM
 Verify Logic Output 1 is set to CLOSE
CONTACT (C3)
 Verify N.C. Inputs are correct
 Safety chain issue
Contactor hardware problem
 Problem with poles or auxiliary
The cube data for the motor
Parameters Corrupted
side processor is invalid.
 Re-enter parameters and power-cycle
 If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board
 Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
The cube identification number Hardware Problem
for the motor side is invalid.
 Power cycle the drive.
 Verify the Cube ID board is properly
connected and fully seated
 Check MS Drive Info in submenu U6 to verify
processor is reading the correct cube id
 If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board
Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
90
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Curr Reg Flt
Description
Declared if the current
regulator loses the ability to
generate the current required
by the speed regulator.
DCU Data Flt
The DCU parameters
checksum is invalid on the
motor side.
Dir Conflict
(alarm)
Declared when the speed
command is held at zero due
conflict with the analog speed
command polarity and the run
up / run down logic
DIR CONFIRM (C1) must be
enabled.
Drive Temp.
(fault)
One or more of the IGBT
modules on the motor side
power bridge has exceeded
95C (203F).
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Problem with Motor Contactor
 Verify that motor contactor is closing
 Verify motor contactor is not opening
unexpectedly
Faulty current feedback signals
 Verify that reported drive current is zero when
drive is not operating
 Verify connections to current transducers
Loss of gate power supply
 Verify base block jumper is between TB2-7
and TB2-14
Incorrect DC Bus Voltage reading
 Measure the dc bus with a meter
 Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, MS BUS VOLT (D2) or DC BUS
VOLTS (D3)
 Increase the boost voltage
Inaccurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values (A6) are
entered correctly
Motor Problems
Verify Motor Armature does not have an open
armature wire
Parameters Corrupted
 Check & re-enter parameters and power cycle
the drive
 If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board
Check Parameter Settings
 Sensitivity determined by the ZERO SPEED
LEVEL (A1)
Confirm Speed Command Polarity
 Check polarity of the analog speed command
on analog channel #1
 Compare that with the RUN UP (positive) and
RUN DOWN (negative) logic input status
 If nuisance, the function can be disabled by
DIR CONFIRM (C1) parameter.
Overtemperature Problems
 Manually verify blower has correct operation
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Inspect IGBT modules for proper mounting
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A5)
Hardware Problem
 View DS Module Temp (D2), LS Module Temp
(D2), Field IGBT Temp (D2); determine which
module is causing fault
Possible defective temperature sensor
91
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Drive Temp.
(alarm)
DRIVE
OVERLOAD
Description
One or more of the IGBT
modules on the motor side
power bridge has exceeded
85C (185F).
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Overtemperature Problems
 Manually verify blower has correct operation
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Inspect IGBT modules for proper mounting
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A5)
Hardware Problem
 View DS Module Temp (D2), LS Module Temp
(D2), Field IGBT Temp (D2); determine which
module is causing fault
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Drive has detected an overload Check Connections
 Monitor D2 Motor overload to help identify
condition.
when the fault occurred.
At 1.0 PU current the drive can  An unusual condition causing unusual drag on
the motor.
run continuously.
At 1.5 PU current, the drive can  Defective motor fields.
run for 60 seconds.
At 2.5 PU current, the drive can
run for 5 seconds.
In the event these limits are
exceeded, the drive will declare
a DRIVE OVRLOAD fault and
shutdown. These settings are
not adjustable and cannot be
defeated.
92
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Encoder Flt
Extrn Fault 1
Extrn Fault 2
Description
The drive is in a run condition
and the encoder is:
not functioning
or
not connected
or
phasing direction is not proper
with motor rotation.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Encoder Phasing Should Match Motor Rotation
 If Reversed Tach Fault is indicated the
encoder rotation is backwards
 Swap two encoder wires (A and /A)
 Verify that speed is reported back to the drive
by manually rotating the encoder and
observing the speed feedback on the display.
Encoder Power Supply Loss
 Check 12 or 5 volt supply on terminal strip
Accurate Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are entered
correctly
 Verify encoder PPR value is correct
 Verify that the Tach Volt Sense (A6) is at least
set to default.
 Verify that the Tach Speed Sense (A6) is at
least set to default.
 If problem is due to a high IR drop on the
armature, increase the value of Tach Volt
Sense (A6)
Response of Speed Regulator
 Enter accurate INERTIA (A1) parameter
 Increase RESPONSE (A1) parameter
Encoder Coupling Sloppy or Broken
 Check encoder to motor coupling
 Possible bad encoder
Excessive Noise on Encoder Lines
 Check encoder connections. Separate
encoder leads from power wiring (cross power
lead at 90)
 Ensure that encoder shaft and frame are
electrically isolated from the motor
Motor Problem
 Check for open motor armature (may occur
with Open Armature Flt)
 Check for dirty commutator
Hardware Problem
 Possible bad IGBT
 Possible bad Customer Interface PCB
User defined external logic fault Check Parameter Settings and External Fault
input
Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
...Closure of this contact will
the correct TB1 terminal and set to EXTRN
cause the drive to declare the
FAULT 1 (C2)
fault
 Verify the source of the external fault signal.
User defined external logic fault Check Parameter Settings and External Fault
input
Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
...Closure of this contact will
the correct TB1 terminal and set to EXTRN
cause the drive to declare the
FAULT 2 (C2)
fault
 Verify the source of the external fault signal.
93
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Extrn Fault 3
Extrn Fault 4
Field Ground
Field I REG
Field IGBT
Description
User defined external logic fault
input
...Closure of this contact will
cause the drive to declare the
fault
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameter Settings and External Fault
Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
the correct TB1 terminal and set to EXTRN
FAULT 3 (C2)
 Verify the source of the external fault signal.
User defined external logic fault Check Parameter Settings and External Fault
input
Signal Wiring
 Check the correct logic input is configured for
...Opening of this contact will
the correct TB1 terminal and set to EXTRN
cause the drive to declare the
/FLT 4 (C2)
fault
 Verify the source of the external fault signal.
The hardware has detected a Check Motor Field wiring
ground fault in the field circuit.  Check motor field wiring and motor field for
The current going into the field
insulation breakdown, unintentional contact to
coil F1 does not match the
other objects, or shorts
current returning from the field  Ensure proper connection of shield drain wires
coil F2.
to chassis
Check between Motor field and Interpoles
 Verify no issue between motor field and
interpoles
 Sparking may occur if field and interpoles are
shorting together
Check Wiring
 Missing jumper wire at Customer Interface
Board PCB, TB2
Possible bad current sensor
 Verify Field Current Transducer connections
 Replace Field Control Module
The field regulator cannot
Check motor field and wiring
regulate properly.
 Verify motor field and motor wirings are not
open
 Verify A24J1 (Field Module) and A4JP1
(Motor-Side Product Interface PCB)
connections
Check Parameter Settings
 Verify proper setting for FULL FLD CURR
(A6), WEAK FLD CURR (A6), and STANDBY
FIELD (A6)
 Hardware Failure
A de-saturation condition has Check motor field and wiring
been detected on a field power  Verify motor field and motor wirings are not
bridge IGBT.
shorted
If re-occurs and the motor field and wirings are
okay, suspect a defective field module IGBT
94
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Field LOSS
Description
The field voltage has been
above 35% of rated and the
field current below 2% of rated
for 1.5 seconds
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check motor field and wiring
 Verify motor field and motor wirings are not
open
 Verify A24J1 (Field Module) and A4JP1
(Motor-Side Product Interface PCB)
connections
 Verify the following LEDs on the Electrical
Control Board (46S04174-0010) are lit: DS1
Line 1, DS2 Line 2, and DS3 Line 3
 Verify Bus Voltage is present on A24Tb1(1)(4)
 Verify Bus voltage is present on the topside of
F3 and F4 on the Field Module Supply.
 Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
Field Temp.
(fault)
One or more of the IGBT
modules on the field module
has exceeded 95C (203F).
Overtemperature Problems
 Manually fan on module is working correctly
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Inspect the IGBT module for proper mounting
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Hardware Problem
 View Field IGBT Temp (D2) to see what
temperature the drive is reading for the field
module
Possible defective temperature sensor
Field Temp.
(alarm)
One or more of the IGBT
modules on the field module
has exceeded 85C (185F).
Overtemperature Problems
 Manually fan on module is working correctly
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Inspect the IGBT module for proper mounting
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Hardware Problem
 View Field IGBT Temp (D2) to see what
temperature the drive is reading for the field
module
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Fld Cur Set Hi
The field current is set above Check Parameter Settings
the 20A jumper level when the  Verify FULL FLD CURRENT (A6), WEAK FLD
drive contains the Low Voltage
CURRENT (A6), and STANDBY FIELD (A6)
Field Module
are set below 20A when JP1 on the field
module PCB is A.
Check Jumpers
 Verify Jumper JP1 on the Field module is
placed in the correct field ampere range
 Note: Drive automatically detects the type of
field module, either Low Voltage Field Module
or Standard Field Module. If the Low Voltage
Field Module is being used, drive
automatically detects max current level for the
field.
95
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Fld PWM Set Hi
Description
The FLD CARRIER FRQ (A4)
is set too high for the type of
Field Module detected.
Fld Over Curr
If field current exceeds 250%
the fault is declared
immediately.
Full Fld Time
Base Ena Opnd
Gate Pwr Ena
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameter Settings
 Verify FLD CARRIER FRQ (A4) is set at or
below 10kHz when a standard field module is
being use.
Note: Drive automatically detects the type of field
module, either Low Voltage Field Module or
Standard Field Module.
Check Parameter Settings
 Verify parameter settings for motor field
control
Check motor field and wiring
If field current exceeds 150%
 Check motor field and wiring for short circuits
for 0.5 seconds, the fault will be
Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
declared.
powered down before fault will clear.
If field current is less than
110% no fault will be declared.
Drive was commanded to
provide Full Field current but
not told to Start for longer than
the time set in FULL FIELD
TIME (A1)
The contact between TB2-7
and TB2-14 on the customer
interface board was open when
the drive was commanded to
run or was running.
Incorrect Start Timing
 Check for proper drive Start sequencing
signals
Verify FULL FIELD TIME (A1)
Check Connections
 Verify external contact between TB2-7 and
TB2-14 is closed
 Verify +24VDC is present on pin TB2-7
 Check the cable from A6JC3 to A4JP9

The Gate Power Enable signal External Relay Timing
was removed for more than 50  Check for improper external relay timing
msec while the drive was
 Check Wiring
running or when told to Run.
 Missing jumper wire at Customer Interface
PCB, TB2-7 to TB2-14
No Base Enbl
Drive has detected that the
Check Connections
base enable signal has opened  Verify external contact between TB2-7 and
after the run request but before
TB2-14 is closed
the motor has not run yet
 Verify +24VDC is present on pin TB2-7
 Check the cable from A6JC3 to A4JP9
Gate Alarm
This alarm will not shut down Hardware problem
the drive, but will be
Change the (A4) MS product interface board
acknowledged in the Fault
Counters. It will be declared if
the redundant internal sense of
the state of the gate power
enable does not match.
96
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Hit Torque Limit The drive is or was being
limited by the motor current
(alarm)
limit setting. This can limit
acceleration rates and cause
subsequent velocity tracking
errors.
HW/SW
Mismatch
Invalid
Checksum
(operator serial
link error)
IP Comm
Line HI Volts
LS A to D
LS AC CNTCR
LS BRDG GND
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Incorrect Wiring
 Verify motor armature circuit wiring
 Verify motor field current is correct
Drive and/or Motor is Undersized
 Verify drive and/or motor sizing. May need a
larger capacity Drive and / or motor.
Check Parameter Settings
 Check the torque limit parameter MTR
TORQUE LIMIT (A1)
 Check speed regulator parameters
RESPONSE and INERTIA (A1)
 Alarm sensitivity - TRQ LIM MSG DELAY (A1)
parameter determines the amount of time the
drive is in torque limit before the alarm
message is displayed.
Line side software is installed Mismatching cube ids vs. software
in the motor side control board  Replace A2 board with correct software for
and cube id is for motor side
board location or program correct software
into Motor Side Board
The operator received four
Noise or Bad Connector Connection
consecutive invalid messages.  Remove and re-seat the operator in its cradle.
 If re-occurs, the operator or the drive’s control
board may need to be replaced.
A fault has occurred in the
Communication problem
communications channel
 Reset drive
between the Line side and
 Verify Line Side software and Motor Side
Motor side processors. This
software is compatible
was detected on the motor
 If re-occurs, replace Main Processor PCBs
side.
Line voltage is greater than
Line Voltage is too High
max drive rating. Monitored via  Verify DC Bus is reading voltage correctly
the DC Bus.
 Verify Line voltage is set correctly
The Analog to Digital
Line Side Analog to Digital Conversion
conversion on the line side
incorrect
control board is not working
 Replace Line Side Main and Power Interface
properly.
PCBs
The main AC power contactor AC Power Contactor Problem
is not following the commanded  Check for faulty UTM contactor coil or
state within 1 second.
interlocking aux contact blocks on PCM or
UTM
 Verify that pilot relay K2 on PCB A8 is working
properly
 CAUTION: Do not manually engage the UTM
contactor with power applied.
The hardware has detected a IGBT Breakdown
ground fault on the line side
 Inspect and measure for physical voltage
power bridge.
breakdown damage on IGBTs and DC bus
97
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
LS Charge
LS CHK Setup
LS Cube Data
LS Cube ID
Description
The DC bus voltage has not
stabilized above the voltage
fault level within 2 seconds or
the charge contactor has not
closed after charging
OR
The DC bus voltage is below
the UV Fault level as defined
by the INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5)
and UV FAULT LEVEL (A4)
parameters
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) and UV FAULT
LEVEL (A4) parameters
 Verify proper input voltage and increase, if
necessary, the input AC voltage within the
proper range
 Check for a missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to starting
of other equipment
Incorrect Setting
 Verify the PCM pulls in
 Observe DC BUS VOLTS (D3) and verify it
increases until the fault occurs
Please note, if LS Charge
occurs 3 consecutive times, the  Observe DC BUS VOLTS (D3) decreased
after the fault as occurred
drive will require a power cycle
 If this is the case, increase the setting in PRE
to reset the fault
CHRGE THRESH (A5)
DC Bus Problems
 If this is the case, increase the setting in PRE
CHRGE THRESH (A5)
 Observe DC BUS VOLTS (D3)
 If no voltage is present, check DC Bus Voltage
on the Field Supply Board (A24) TB1(1)TB1(4)
 Verify connectors (A3JP8 on Product Interface
Board and A11JG3 on Power Module Gate
Drive Board) are seated correctly
Hardware Failure
 Possible Damaged Product Interface Board
 Possible Damaged Pre-Charge Resistor and /
or Pre-Charge Contactor
 Possible Damaged Main Charge Contactor
Drive may need to be replaced
This fault is logged when a new Inconsistent Parameter Settings
program is loaded to the line
 Verify Parameters settings in menu A1, A2,
side processor, and the default
A3, A4, and A6 are correct
data is loaded for the
parameter values.
The cube data for the line side Invalid Cube ID
processor is invalid.
Verify LS Cube ID is seated correctly and not
damaged
The generation of this fault is Invalid Cube ID
indicative of a bad processor
 Verify LS Cube ID is seated correctly and not
board.
damaged
 Verify LS Cube ID in U7 is correct
 Indicates a bad processor board
98
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
LS Curr Reg
Description
Inability to regulate AC side to
match incoming line 3-phase
voltage.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Faulty current feedback signals
 Verify connections to current transducers
Incorrect DC Bus Voltage reading
 Measure the dc bus with a meter
 Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, DC BUS VOLTS (D3) or MS BUS
VOLTS (D2)
Parameter Settings
 Increase DC BUS V BOOST (A5)
 Set BUS VREF SOURCE (A5) to TRK VIN
PARAM
 Decrease values in Id REG INTGRL GAIN
(A5) and Iq REG INTGRL GAIN (A5)
 Decrease values in Id REG PROP GAIN (A5)
and Iq REG PROP GAIN (A5)
External Relay Timing
 Check for improper external relay timing
 Verify UTM is closed
Check Wiring
 Missing jumper wire at Customer Interface
Board PCB, TB2
 Missing jumper at JP9 on Product Interface
Board, A3
Hardware / software not at the latest revision
 Check with tech support to verify that the drive
has the correct version product interface
boards and software. It should have
46S03954-0030 RV07 or later.

The DCU parameters
LS DCU Data
Parameters Corrupted
checksum is invalid on the line
Check & re-enter Line Side parameters and
side.
power cycle the drive
Improper Line Side Menu Parameters (A5)
LS HIT TRQ LMT The line side is or was being
limited by the motoring current  Verify and correct all Line side (A5) parameter
(alarm)
data
limit or regenerative current
limit setting. This can limit
Low Line Voltage
current into the dc bus leading  Input line voltage is too low causing current to
to an under-voltage condition,
be too high for the operating power level
or limit current into the line
Verify INPUT L-L VOLTAGE (A5)
leading to a bus over-voltage
condition.
Motor side software is installed Mismatching cube ids vs. software
LS HW/SW
in the line side control board
 Replace A1 board with correct software for
and cube id is for line side
board location or program correct software
into Line Side Board
The line side power interface
LS I Conn Off
Missing Connector
board has detected a missing  Verify JP7 connector is connected and seated
or loose connector on the
properly
motor side.
 Verify the current tranducers, CT1, CT2 and
CT3 connections are connected and seated
properly
99
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
LS IGBT 1,2,3
LS IP Comm
LS Overcurr
LS Overload
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
A de-saturation condition has Bridge failure
been detected on the line side  Turn the power off on the drive; wait for the
IGBT power module.
bus to drop to zero. Measure at F3, 4 for DC
voltage. Once at zero volts go to the next step.
Note: Module 2 or 3 IGBT fault  With an ohm meter check on the upper gate
should not occur. If that is
board from phase A, B, C to + then – (on the
reported change the line side
cap board) then reverse the leads and check
product interface board.
again from + then -. Next do the same check
on the lower MS gating board, check from the
(+) output to the + then – connections on the
cap board, then (-) output to the + then – on
the cap board, reverse the leads do it again.
If anything reads shorted, then that would
indicate an IGBT failure. Call Magnetek to
confirm results and get advice on what to do
next.
Motor Problem
 Check motor armature and wiring for short
circuits
Field Control Problem
Open F3, 4 fuses, check if problem goes
away.
Product Interface Problem
Try replacing the board

A fault has occurred in the
Miscommunication problem
communications channel
 Verify proper software installed in Line Side
between the Line side and
and Motor Side processors
Motor side processors. This
If re-occurs, replace PCB A2
was detected on the line side.
The line side power converted Overcurrent Problem
has detected that 280% rated  Check for a possible short circuit in motor or
amps has been detected by the
external power wiring.
current transducers through the  This could also be a result of other faults
product interface PCB (A3).
occurring first. Verify by reviewing the fault
history prior to this event.
Poor Regulator Tuning
 Check LS parameters, these are in the A5
menu. These are factory set and shouldn’t
need to be adjusted. Verify that they are at
default.
An overload condition has been Excessive Current Draw
detected on the line side power  Decrease accel/decel rate
bridge.
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Drive Sizing
 Verify drive sizing with motor ampere
requirements. May need a larger capacity
drive
Drive Setup
Check field current, description located under
PROT LIM ACTIVE (alarm)
100
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
LS Overtemp
(fault)
Description
One or more of the IGBT
modules on the line side power
bridge has exceeded 95C
(203F).
LS Over Temp
(alarm)
One or more of the IGBT
Overtemperature Problems
modules on the line side power  Verify LS Module Temp (D2) exceeds
bridge has exceeded 85C
Overtemp rating
(185F).
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A6)
The line side power converter Line Converter Problem
has detected an over-voltage  Verify the line converter did not shutdown
condition.
while the motor controller was in process of
regeneration
Check Parameter Settings
 Bad tuning of the line side regulators
Contactor Problem
 Verify motor contactor did not open while
motoring
PCU parameters checksum is Parameters Corrupted
invalid on the line side.
 Check & re-enter Line Side parameters and
power cycle the drive
LS Overvolt
LS PCU Data
LS Phase
The line side converter has
detected the loss of one or
more phases of the AC line.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Overtemperature Problems
 Verify LS Module Temp (D2) exceeds
Overtemp rating
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A6)
Input Line to Line Phase Loss
 Verify all 3 AC line phases are correct
 Check line fuses
 Verify INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) is set correctly
 Verify wiring to / from contactor UTM
 Verify 3 phase signal wiring to PCB A8
 If re-occurs, replace A8
101
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
LS Size
Description
The line side power converter
has detected that the power
bridge size and cube I.D. size
does not match.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Hardware Mismatch
 Size of the power bridge does not match the
rating as defined on the cube ID board. Call
tech support to verify the proper locations for
the jumpers on the gating boards.
 Check for correct Cube ID board located on
A3 product interface board, verify by looking
up motor side cube I.D. in the U6 menu, then
ensure it matches the table in this manual.

LS SW BUS OV
The line side power converter
has detected an over-voltage
condition above setting SW
BUS OV LEVEL (A5)
Line Converter Problem
 Verify the line converter did not shutdown
while the motor controller was in process of
regeneration
Check Parameter Settings
 Verify setting of SW BUS OV LEVEL (A5)
 Bad tuning of the line side regulators
Contactor Problem
 Verify motor contactor did not open while
motoring
LS Undr Voltg
(alarm)
The DC Bus has fallen below
the under voltage alarm level.
The alarm level is set by UV
Alarm Level parameter.
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) and UV
ALARM LEVEL (A4)
 Verify proper input voltage and increase, if
necessary, the input AC voltage within the
proper range
 Check for missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to starting
of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the DC Bus
 Measure the DC bus with a meter
Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, MS BUS VOLTAGE (D2) or DC BUS
VOLTS (D3)
LS Undrvolt
(fault)
The DC Bus has fallen below
the under voltage fault level.
The fault level is set by UV
FAULT Level parameter.
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) and UV FAULT
LEVEL (A4)
 Verify proper input voltage and increase, if
necessary, the input AC voltage within the
proper range
 Check for missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to starting
of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the DC Bus
 Measure the DC bus with a meter
 Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, MS BUS VOLTAGE (D2) or DC BUS
VOLTS (D3)
102
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
A de-saturation condition has Bridge failure
Module A IGBT been detected on the specified  Turn the power off on the drive; wait for the
motor side IGBT power
bus to drop to zero. Measure at F3, 4 for DC
module.
voltage. Once at zero volts go to the next step.
 With an ohm meter check on the upper gate
Note: Module B or C IGBT fault
board from phase A, B, C to + then – (on the
should not occur. If that is
cap board) then reverse the leads and check
reported change the motor side
again from + then -. Next do the same check
product interface board.
on the lower MS gating board, check from the
(+) output to the + then – connections on the
cap board, then (-) output to the + then – on
the cap board, reverse the leads do it again.
If anything reads shorted, then that would
indicate an IGBT failure. Call Magnetek to
confirm results and get advice on what to do
next.
Motor Problem
 Check motor armature and wiring for short
circuits
Product Interface Problem
 Try replacing the board
The revision level of the
Monitor Rev
Software Problem
monitor data structure shared  Re-load proper software into both processors
between the line and motor
side processors does not
match.
The motor submenu (A6) does Incorrect Parameter Settings
Motor ID Flt
not have properly defined
 Verify the Motor Submenu (A6) contains valid
motor parameters
values
Note: The following parameters in the A6
submenu are defaulted at zero. These must be
changed to values within their respective ranges
before the fault can be cleared. Those parameters
are: RATED MOTOR CURR, ARMATURE
VOLTAGE, FULL FLD CURRENT, WEAK FLD
CURRENT, and ARMATURE IR DROP.
The motor side power interface Missing Connector
MS I Conn Off
board has detected a missing  Verify JP7 connector on the motor side PI
or loose connector on the
board and the current transducers, CT5 and
motor side.
CT6 connections are connected and seated
properly
MS-LS Mismatch The revision level for
Misplaced Jumper
parameter data shared
 Verify the Line Side and Motor Side
between the line side and
Programming jumper on JM13 is in NORMAL
motor side processors does not
mode, not in PROGRAM mode
match.
Software Incompatibility
 Contact Factory
Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
103
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
MS Size
MTR Data Flt
Mtr Overload
(alarm)
Mtr Settings
No Drv
Handshake
(operator serial
link error)
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
The motor side power
Hardware Mismatch
converter has detected that the  Size of the power bridge does not match the
power bridge size and cube
rating as defined on the cube ID board. Call
I.D. size does not match.
tech support to verify the proper locations for
the jumpers on the gating boards.
 Check for correct Cube ID board located on
A4 product interface board, verify by looking
up motor side cube I.D. in the U6 menu, then
ensure it matches the table in this manual.
Motor parameters checksum is Parameters Corrupted
invalid.
 Check & re-enter Motor Side (A4) parameters
and power cycle the drive
If re-occurs, replace Drive Control board A2
The motor had exceeded the
Verify Overload Curve Parameters
user defined motor overload
 Check both OVLD START LEVEL (A6) and
curve.
OVLD TIME OUT (A6) parameters.
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify that FULL FLD AMPS (A6) and WEAK
FLD AMPS (A6) are set correctly so that motor
can produce rated torque
 Verify that motor armature voltage is correct
for applied speed and load
Accurate Motor Parameters
 Verify motor nameplate values are entered
correctly
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease accel/decel rate
 Verify elevator counterweights
 Verify mechanical release of elevator brake
Motor Problem
 Check for motor failure
Check for faulty motor wiring
The fault looks for proper motor Improper Parameter Setting
 Verify RATED MOTOR CURR (A6) setting
values.
 Verify ARMATURE VOLTS (A6)
 Verify FULL FLD CURRENT (A6)
The operator lost
Bad Connector Connection
communications with the
 Remove and re-seat the operator in its cradle.
drive’s control board.
 If re-occurs, the operator or the drive’s control
board may need to be replaced.
104
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
No Field Cable
Open Armature
Overcurr Flt
Overspeed Flt
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
A disconnected field cable has Missing Cable
been detected.
 Verify Field Supply (A24J1 or A3JP1)
connector and Current Sense (A4JP4) cable
are connected and properly seated
 Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
Armature current reference has Contactor Problem
remained above 10% of rated,  Verify correct operation of power poles on
but the armature current has
motor armature contactor
remained below 2% of rated for
Motor Problem
more than 2 seconds
 Verify motor is wired correctly
 This fault could indicate an open armature in
motor
 This fault could also indicate a brush problem
in the motor
 Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
The motor side power
Overcurrent Problem
converted has detected that
 Check for a possible short circuit in motor or
280% rated amps has been
external power wiring.
detected by the current
Poor Regulator Tuning
transducers through the
 Check parameters
product interface PCB (A4).
 Complete the motor auto-tune
Missing Current Transducer Cable
 Look on both the Line Side Product Interface
board and the Motor Side Product Interface
board for the LEDs labeled CON_FLT (see
page 121)
 The board that has at least one red LED
labeled CON_FLT lit, is missing the Current
Transducer cable
Encoder
 A defective encoder may sort of work but can
glitch the speed regulator.

Generated when the motor has Check Parameter Settings
gone beyond the user defined  Check OVERSPEED LEVEL (A1) parameter
percentage contract speed for
for the correct level.
a specified amount of time.
 Check OVERSPEED TIME (A1) parameter for
the correct time.
Poor Regulator Tuning
 Check INERTIA (A1) and RESPONSE (A1) for
speed regulator tuning
Speed Request
 Excessive speed dictation signal from car
controller
 Improper feed forward signal
Note: This fault is defined by Overspeed Level
parameter and Overspeed Time parameter.
105
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Overvolt Flt
Description
The DC bus voltage has
exceeded the maximum
allowed value.
PCU data Flt
PCU parameters checksum is
invalid on the motor side.
PROT LIM
ACTIVE
(alarm)
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Line Converter Problem
 Verify the line converter did not shutdown
while the motor controller was in process of
regeneration
 Verify AC line didn’t lose a phase while drive
was in the process of regen
Check Parameter Settings
 Bad tuning of either the motor side regulators
Contactor Problem
Verify motor contactor did not open while motoring
Parameters Corrupted
 Check parameters and power cycle
If re-occurs, replace Main Control PCB A2
Self-Protection Current limit
Check Connections
 Dragging brake
was active.
 Overloaded condition on the elevator
As the drive begins a travel, the  The setup of the motor may not be correct,
check if the field current is set correctly. Hint:
system current limit is adjusted
more field current will reduce armature amps
from 1.8 PU at zero speed, up
and increase armature volts. On an SCR
to 2.5 PU at 15% of rated
drive it had a limitation that the motor volts
speed. If this limit is reached
cannot exceed the line volts. However on the
the drive will display an alarm
PWM DC drive with an active boost on the
called PROT LIM ACTIVE.
front end that limitation is lifted.
System current limit is based
on the drive rating and the
maximum rating would be
2.5PU, this is not the same as
the A1 Current limit which is
based on motor amps.
If in this condition the elevator
will not track.
Power On
Ready, Waiting
For Drive
(operator)
Reverse Tach
S-Chain Event
(alarm)
Annunciation that the drive has  No Corrective Action needed
successfully powered up
The operator is waiting to
Normal, if displayed momentarily
establish communications with  No action is required, if the message
the drive’s control board.
disappears shortly after power-up of the
operator
Bad Connector Connection
 Remove and re-seat the operator in its cradle
 If re-seating of the operator does not work, the
operator may need to be replaced
See ENCODER FLT
See ENCODER FLT
 Note: This fault cannot be reset, unit must be
powered down before fault will clear.
Elevator Safety Chain opened Safety Chain Problem
while the drive was running.
 Safety Chain was opened during a run
Verify correct Safety-Chain operation and timing
106
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Setup Fault 4
Description
This fault is declared if the
contract motor speed (in rpm),
encoder pulses/revolution, and
encoder/motor ratio do not
satisfy the following equations:
 enc 

 contract encoder

 ratio18106
3.6 105 


mtr
spd
pulses


 mult


Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check ENCODER PULSES (A1) parameter
for correct setting
 Check CONTRACT MTR SPD (A1) parameter
for correct setting
 Check ENC RATIO MULT (A1) parameter for
correct setting
 enc 

 encoder  

   ratio 32,700
 pulses   mult 


Setup Fault 6
Setup Fault 7
Setup Fault 8
SER RUN
METHOD
This fault is declared if the
multi-step speed references
have exceeded a defined limit,
which is defined in terms of a
percentage of contract speed
(CONTRACT CAR SPD
parameter).
This fault is declared if the run
logic inputs are defined
incorrectly. You can either
choose group #1 (RUN and
UP/DWN) or group #2 (RUN
UP and RUN DOWN). But you
cannot mix and match or this
fault will be declared.
This fault is declared if the DIR
CONFIRM (C1) parameter is
enabled and any of the
following conditions are not
met:
A logic input (C2) must be
assigned to RUN UP.
A logic input (C2) must be
assigned to RUN DOWN.
The SPD COMMAND SRC
(C1) parameter must be set to
ANALOG INPUT
... Confirms proper set-up of
Analog Speed Command
direction confirm function
This fault will be declared if:
serial Mode_1 is active
or
serial Mode_2 is active
or
Mode_2_Test is active
and
The 'RUN COMMAND SRC' is
set to 'EXTERNAL TB'
Check Parameters Settings
 Check SPEED COMMAND1-16 (A3)
parameters, if greater than 150% of
CONTRACT CAR SPD (A1) parameter
Note: This fault is only declared with SPD CMD
SRC (C1) equals MULTISTEP or SER
MULTISTEP
Check Parameters Settings
 Check configurations of logic inputs (C2) –
either RUN & UP/DWN or RUN UP & RUN
DOWN
Check Parameters Settings:
 Check configurations of logic inputs (C2) for
two logic input defined as RUN UP & RUN
DOWN
 Verify SPD COMMAND SRC (C1) is set to
ANALOG INPUT
 If nuisance fault and not using Up-Down
Confirm, function disabled by setting the DIR
CONFIRM (C1) parameter to DISABLED
Check Parameters Settings:
 Verify RUN COMMAND SRC (C1) is set to
serial + extrn or serial
107
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Sft Cn Opened
Sft Cn Not
Closed
Speed Dev
(alarm)
Srl Timeout
TQ LIM 2Hi
4CUBE
Description
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Safety Chain is open and motor Contactor Problem
 Check motor contactor power
contactor power was not
 Verify safety chain was closed
available when the drive was
commanded to start.
Parameter Settings
 Verify C2 Logic Inputs contains setting CTR
PWR SENSE
Contactor power sense on
TB1-2 is opened for 20mS
Hardware problem
when the regulator release is  Verify wiring to A6TB1-2, this input is on if the
active and the speed reference
contactor power is on.
is greater than 20% of contract If the above point is not on check at A8TB4-1 &
speed.
A8TB4-4, this is the input for the 240Vac control
power.
Safety Chain was closed and Improper drive On-Run-Stop sequencing
motor contactor power was
 Verify Safety Chain operation
removed after the contactor
 Verify Safety Chain timing
has been confirmed as picked. Hardware problem
 Verify wiring to A6TB1-2, this input is on if the
contactor power is on.
 If the above point is not on check at A8TB4-1
& A8TB4-4, this is the input for the 240Vac
control power.
The speed feedback is failing Any active faults?
to properly track the speed
 Check if any active faults in F1 sub-menu
reference.
Check Parameters Settings:
Sensitivity determined by SPD
 Verify SPD DEV HI LEVEL (A1) is set to the
DEV HI LEVEL (A1) parameter.
proper level.
Does “Hit CURRENT Limit” message appear?
 If message appears during running, verify a
fault has not occurred.
 Then, increase the torque limit parameters
MTR TORQUE LIMIT and REGEN TORQ
LIMIT (A1) – maximum 250%
The drive is being operated by Bad Serial Connection
serial communications and one  Remove and re-seat the RS-422 serial cable
of the following has occurred:  Check car controller serial driver board
Communication time-out – The  Check the serial cable connected to the drive’s
drive did not receive a valid
RS-422 port
run-time message within 40ms  The Customer I/O PCB on the drive may need
to be replaced
while running
Bad message checksum –
 Possible problem with car controller serial
Drive has detected 3
communication
consecutive bad message
Grounding Issue
 Check grounding between car controller and
checksums
drive
 Noise on serial channel due to the cable
The torque limits (based on the Check Parameter Settings
defined motor) exceed the
 Verify motor nameplate values are entered
cube’s capacity.
correctly in the A6 submenu
Example:
 Decrease CURRENT LIMIT (A1), until the
A6(Rated Motor I) x A1(Ilim) /
formula is satisfied. If more accel amps are
100 cannot exceed the rating of
required then a larger drive will be needed.
the Quattro.
Drive Sizing
 Verify drive sizing.
108
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
Undervolt Flt
Description
Generated during a run
condition when the DC bus
voltage drops below the user
specified percent of the DC link
voltage. The fault level is
specified by the UV Fault Level
parameter.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) and UV FAULT
LEVEL (A4)
 Verify proper input voltage and increase, if
necessary, the input AC voltage within the
proper range
 Check for missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to starting
of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the DC Bus
 Measure the DC bus with a meter
 Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, MS BUS VOLTAGE (D2) or DC BUS
VOLTS (D3)
Util Data Sum
The line side calculated
checksum is not the same as
the stored checksum
Hardware Failure
 Cycle power to the Drive
 If re-occurs, replace line side main control
board (A1)
Utility Temp
(fault)
One or more of the IGBT
Overtemperature Problems
modules on the line side power  Verify LS Module Temp (D2) exceeds
bridge has exceeded 95C
Overtemp rating
(203F).
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A6)
One or more of the IGBT
Overtemperature Problems
modules on the line side power  Verify LS Module Temp (D2) exceeds
bridge has exceeded 85C
Overtemp rating
(185F).
 Inspect and clean air intake filters
 Verify ambient temperature is less than 45C
 Verify drive is sized correctly
 Possible defective temperature sensor
Excessive Current Draw
 Decrease Accel / Decel rates
 Mechanical brake not releasing properly
Excessive Field Weakening
 Verify Weak Field Motor Parameters (A6)
Utility Temp
(alarm)
109
Quattro DC Troubleshooting
Name
UV Alarm
(alarm)
SER2 SPD FLT
Description
Generated during a run
condition when the DC bus
voltage drops below the user
specified percent of the dc link
voltage. The fault level is
specified by the UV Alarm
Level parameter.
SER2 RS CRP SPD or SER2
INSP SPD is set greater than
Contract Car Speed. Only
applies when Serial Mode 2 is
selected.
Possible Causes & Corrective Action
Low Input Voltage
 Check INPUT L-L VOLTS (A5) and UV
ALARM LEVEL (A4)
 Verify proper input voltage and increase, if
necessary, the input AC voltage within the
proper range
 Check for missing input phase
 Check power line disturbances due to starting
of other equipment
Drive Accurately Reading the DC Bus
 Measure the DC bus with a meter
 Compare that with the value on the digital
operator, MS BUS VOLTAGE (D2) or DC BUS
VOLTS (D3)
 SER2 RS CRP SPD and SER2 INSP SPD
must be less than Contract Car Speed.
Table 15: Troubleshooting Guide
110
Appendix – Auto Tune Procedure
If there are no faults present, the drive will
display:
Appendix
Auto Tune Procedure
The following details the procedure on how to
run auto tune on a Quattro DC drive. The
purpose of auto tune allows the drive to
calculate the following motor parameters:
 Armature Inductance
 Armature Resistance
 Field Resistance
 Field Time Constant
 Armature Resistance Voltage Drop at
Motor Rated Current
PRESS ENTER TO
CONFIRM REQUEST
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press “enter” to start. There are 5 sections
within the Auto Tune Test. The first section
will boost the drive if the drive is not currently
boosting. During this section, the drive will
display:
IMPORTANT: Brake must be set while auto
tune is running for valid data.
NOTE: No faults may be present on the drive
and contactor power (safety chain must be
closed) must be available for Auto Tune to
begin. 15 seconds must elapse before
reattempting the procedure.
AUTO TUNE
TUNING #1
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
NOTE: Auto Tune may take up to 1 minute to
complete. Please wait until the message
AUTOTUNE DONE displays to continue
working with the drive.
The second section will test the Armature
Resistance. During this section, the drive will
display:
To run Auto tune by use of the operator, use
the AUTO TUNE MOTOR parameter in the A4
menu. The Operator will display:
AUTO TUNE
TUNING #2
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
AUTO TUNE MOTOR
A4 START TUNE ?
The third section will test the Field Resistance.
During this section, the drive will display:
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Press the “enter” key. If there are any active
faults on the drive, “Not Available at This Time”
will display and Auto Tune will not run:
AUTO TUNE
TUNING #3
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Not Available at
This Time
The fourth section will measure the Armature
Inductance. While testing the Armature
Inductance, the field will be increased to full
field. During this section, the drive will display:
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
111
Appendix – Auto Tune Procedure
SELECTION (A4) is set to USE SAVED PAR
or USE SELF TUNE.
If GAIN SELECTION (A4) is set to USE SELF
TUNE, the armature current regulator gains
are set using AUTO MEAS ARM L(D2), AUTO
MEAS IR DROP (D2), AUTO MEAS ARM R
(D2), AUTO FIELD RES (D2), and AUTO
FIELD TC (D2).
AUTO TUNE
TUNING #4
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
The final section will measure the Field Time
Constant. During this section, the drive will
display:
If GAIN SELECTION (A4) is set to USE
SAVED PAR, the armature regulator gains are
set using SAVE MEAS ARM L (A6), SAVE IR
DROP (A6), SAVE MEAS ARM R (A6), SAVE
FIELD RES (A6), and SAVE FIELD TC (A6).
If the D2 submenu contains null values and USE
SELF TUNE is selected, GAIN SELECTION (A4)
will revert back to MANUAL. Similarly, if the
SAVE MEAS parameters in the A6 submenu
contain null values and USE SAVED PAR is
selected, GAIN SELECTION (A4) will revert back
to MANUAL.
AUTO TUNE
TUNING #5
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
After Auto tune is finished, the drive will
display:
When GAIN SELECTION (A4) is set to
MANUAL, the armature current regulator uses
the values in ARM RESISTANCE (A4), ARM
INDUCTANCE (A4), MOTOR FIELD RES
(A4), and MOTOR FIELD TC (A4).
AUTO TUNE
DONE
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
If a fault occurs while the drive is performing
the Auto Tune test, the drive will display:
AUTO TUNE
HAS ABORTED
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
Pressing Enter again will display the name of
the fault that occurred during Auto Tune.
There are two parameters located in A4 that
set the bandwidth for the Armature Regulation
gain and the Field Regulation gain. GAIN
BANDWIDTH A (A4) determines the
bandwidth used in the calculation of the
Armature Regulation Gains. Similarly, GAIN
BANDWIDTH F (A4) determines the bandwidth
used in the calculation of the Field Regulation
Gains.
Quattro DC will not use the values measured
or calculated by auto tune unless GAIN
112
Appendix – Inertia Calculations
Appendix
Inertia Calculations
The Quattro DC software can be used to
calculate the inertia of the entire elevator,
which is used for accurate tuning of the speed
regulator.
A1
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
The following is a step-by-step procedure for
using the Quattro DC to estimate the elevator
system inertia.
Average the two values and enter the DRIVE
A1 parameter. Once this value is calculated
and set, it should not require further adjusting.
Using the Software to Estimate the
System’s Inertia
With a balanced car, run the car at 100%
contract speed from top floor to the bottom
floor then back to the top floor.
Note: To obtain the proper reading the drive
cannot be in field weakening. To disable the
field weakening mode go to the A6 submenu
and set the weak field amps to the same value
as the full field amps. After running the test set
the parameter back. Failure to disable the field
weakening may cause the results to be higher
than required and cause performance issues.
Observe the EST INERTIA under DISPLAY
MENU - ELEVATOR DATA D1 for both the
down and up direction.
D1
INERTIA
01.50 sec
EST INERTIA
1.50 seconds
RUN/FAULT
SUB MENU
DATA ENT
113
Appendix – EMC Compliance
Appendix
Anti-Rollback
Using Anti-Rollback (ARB)
Elevator rollback occurs when an elevator motor drive is started and the brake is released but the hoist
motor has not yet developed enough torque to prevent gravity from moving the car. The car may
move up or down depending on the overall balance of equipment and payload. Velocity regulators
normally used for speed regulation will eventually detect unwanted movement and react to halt the
car. But there will be a position error accumulated during that process that can represent many inches
of unwanted car movement relative to the landing. This effect is most noticeable with low friction gearless elevators. It may be totally masked by the friction of an elevator driven through worm gears.
Rollback by itself does not pose any hazards, but it does give an uneasy, out of control feeling to
passengers. In many installations brake release timing is adjusted so that the brake is released just
as the car begins to accelerate toward the next landing to mask the rollback effect. This often results
in jerky starts as the brake linings release. The correct countermeasure is to weigh the car just as the
doors close to determine the degree of gravity unbalance, then pre-torque the motor so that when the
brake is released all forces are balanced. This method is very effective, but does require expensive
calibrated load weighing equipment.
The purpose of the Magnetek Anti-rollback feature is to help prevent rollback on elevators that do not
use load weighing or do not use the motor pre-torque capability provided by the Magnetek drive. It
uses a double integrator (type 2) regulator when operating at zero speed to hold the elevator car at an
average speed of zero and to regulate a constant position as the brake is released. When the velocity
reference leaves zero speed to accelerate the car toward the next landing, the active velocity regulator
is switched to be E-Reg to precisely track (follow) the velocity reference profile. Be aware that this
anti-rollback feature works from encoder/tachometer signals. So there must and will be some
movement in order for the feature to function, but the position error generated by elevator movement
will recover. The bandwidth gain of the system will determine how much movement will occur.
Several new operating options and adjustments are provided.
Set-Up And Tuning Of Anti-Rollback (ARB)
1. The ARB function uses adjustment settings, Inertia(A1), response(A1). These settings and others
are critical for good performance of the E-Reg velocity regulator. The first step for good ARB
performance is to disable ARB by setting ARB MODE to 0 (zero) and to tune all other E-Reg
adjustments for a smooth ride and good floor-to-floor elevator performance. Be sure that the car
weight and counterweights have been adjusted to be at the final values. Follow the suggested
procedures for tuning E-Reg as listed in this Tech Manual. Ignore elevator rollback while adjusting
primary elevator performance features. If rope resonance exists, also adjust the notch filter for
minimum interference. Then tune up ARB last as necessary to prevent elevator rollback with an
unbalanced payload.
2. After all other adjustments are satisfactory, ARB MODE to a 1 to enable ARB when starting an
elevator run. Set up the following initial ARB adjustment values. Be sure to read ADJUSTMENT
HINTS and CAUTIONS listed below.
a) Set ARB Bandwidth, to 2 times the response setting (A1).
b) Set the initial value of ARB damping, to 0.5.
3. If the drive will be using an internally generated velocity reference or serial link commands set ARB
Speed Threshold to 0.0%, otherwise if an analog reference is used set to 0.5.
4. With the car empty at a convenient landing, prepare to start the elevator drive, call for zero velocity
from the car controller via the normal way, release the elevator brake, and observe any car motion.
When the car comes to a stop, the observation is complete, set the brake and stop the drive, again
through normal control channels. Do so and observe that...
a) The contactor picks, and the drive starts.
b) There may be some initial upward motion, but the car should return to its original position
within a second or so.
c) When motion is halted, there will be motor armature current producing torque holding the car.
This can be observed at armature current (D2) on the local display or a separate DC clampon ammeter, if available.
114
Appendix – Anti-Rollback Setup
d) Set the brake and turn the drive OFF via normal commands. (In that order, to prevent the car
from drifting away!)
5. Repeat #3 several times and.....
a) Increase the setting of ARB Bandwidth to reduce the amount of initial movement as desired.
But there may be more jerkiness. Reducing the setting will allow more movement, but with
less jerk. Adjust for a good compromise.
b) Reduce the setting of ARB Damping to speed up the position recovery, or increase the setting
for a softer recovery, as desired.
c) If oscillations occur, release the brake and shut down the drive or reduce the setting of ARB
Bandwidth to stop them. This may be a practical limit for position tightness in this particular
hoistway. See the hints below for using the notch filter.
6. Change the reference velocity to run the car at normal speeds. Make several empty single or
multiple floor runs up and down to observe the complete starting action. The adjustments made
so far should not alter landing position accuracy. Ride the car to observe the quality of
adjustment.
7. If weights are available, load the car to payload capacity. Repeat the observations and
adjustments of step 4 with a full load. In this case the initial movement should be downward.
Then repeat floor runs as in step 5 with a full load. Ride the car to verify smoothness.
Adjustment procedure is complete.
ARB Adjustment Hints And Cautions
1. Caution, the ARB function can increase regulator bandwidth far beyond that required for
controlling the speed of the elevator. It does so at only near zero speed, but when the ARB gain
bandwidth is boosted it is possible that one or more mechanical resonant frequencies may
become excited to produce unacceptable vibration. If an annoying vibration does occur, try to
determine the resonant frequency. Then use the notch filter to tune it out if possible. Be aware
that the notch filter does cause additional phase shift lag. This can and will interfere with the
operation of E-Reg and ARB. Tune the notch filter to the resonant frequency and adjust notch
depth to the smallest value that suppresses the vibration. Then turn ARB off and verify or re-tune
E-Reg to yield acceptable performance. Then re-tune ARB settings to control rollback. Some
hoist ways may not be compatible with high gain ARB settings.
2. The adjustment settings for Speed Bandwidth and Per-Unit Inertia are used by both the velocity
regulator (E-Reg) and the velocity control portion of ARB, therefore adjustment of them will alter
the performance of anti-rollback controls. Be sure to tune the velocity controls of the elevator
BEFORE adjusting controls for ARB Bandwidth and Damping. Changing any ARB settings will not
interfere with other velocity control tuning.
3. Elevator rollback is a function of gravity load unbalance of the car. This is what causes the car to
move when the brake is released, even though the reference velocity may still be at zero.
However, there is a finite time required for ARB to measure unwanted car motion via the encoder,
produce a counteracting motor torque, and then return the car to the original position. The
reaction time is controlled by ARB Bandwidth. The smoothness and time to settle is controlled by
ARB Damping. The need for ARB starts only when the elevator brake is actually released, not
when it is told to release. (A subtle difference in electromechanical timing.) But the allotted time
for ARB to function will cease as soon as the velocity reference (internal or external) moves away
from zero speed and crosses the threshold identified by ARB threshold.
a) Ideally, there would be adequate dwell time after release of the brake for ARB settling to
occur. But elevator floor-to-floor time specifications do not necessarily allow for any time
delay. If the resulting ARB time is cut short by release of the velocity reference before position
settling is complete, the car will begin to accelerate toward the next landing from wherever it
may be in the ARB cycle. The position regulator to speed regulator change-over will be
smooth, but the repeatability of velocity profile tracking during acceleration may be altered by
the amount of load unbalance and the value of the threshold set in ARB threshold. Keep this
setting as low as possible for best results.
b) If the threshold is set too low ARB may be terminated too early, particularly when using an
external analog reference. This will result in elevator rollback that could have been prevented.
c) If acceleration of the velocity profile is started and crosses the threshold before the elevator
brake actually releases, ARB will not function and may result in elevator roll-back as
acceleration begins. This, and the jerk or vibration sometimes felt by passengers as the motor
115
Appendix – Anti-Rollback Setup
pulls through the brake to start the car, is a result of poor velocity reference release vs brake
release timing. With ARB the velocity reference should not be released to move away from
zero until after the brake is mechanically released. Otherwise the ARB feature cannot work.
4. Anti-Rollback can be used with external load weighing and pre-torque, as these features are
independent of each other. If motor pre-torque values are not precisely correct at the time of
starting the elevator drive, as may occur during elevator re-leveling, the features of ARB will
intervene to help reduce rollback. If pre-torque is accomplished correctly, Anti-rollback will not
need to do anything. However, it can still cause vibration or oscillation if ARB gains are set too
high.
5. It is not always convenient to use payload weights during adjustment. Most elevators are
counterweighted such that an empty car represents an unbalanced load of 43-57%, with the
counterweight being heavier. If Anti-rollback works effectively with an empty car at all landing
stops, it should also perform adequately with full payload weight in the car. Step 7 in the
adjustment procedure indicates how to verify and adjust ARB operation with a full car payload, but
it is not always necessary.
Anti-rollback may also be used to hold the car at a constant position at the end of an elevator run.
Normally this is not required because the velocity regulator, E-Reg, will stabilize and hold an armature
current value as necessary to hold the car at a standstill at the end of an elevator run. However,
turning ARB back on may be useful to aid car re-level positioning without first setting the brake for a
total drive re-start. Set ARB mode to “2” to re-enable ARB when the car returns to zero speed at the
end of an elevator run. Zero speed in this case is measured by the encoder, not the reference, and
defined by the up/down threshold. ARB will remain enabled until the drive is either shut down by
removal run logic, or the internal velocity reference is increased to again be larger than the ARB
threshold. If u/d threshold is set too high, there may be a jerk felt as the car comes to rest and the
control switches to the ARB zero speed / position hold mode. If u/d threshold is set too low, minor
disturbances and movement may delay and possibly prevent control transfer to the ARB hold mode
because the measured encoder speed over a relatively short measuring time appears to not fall below
the threshold value. Set up/down threshold to the lowest value that yields repeatable results.
116
Appendix – EMC Compliance
Appendix
EMC Compliance
Method 2:
1. Use braided, shielded leads for the DC
armature and for the motor field
connections. Note: When shielded multiconductor wire is used, it is very important
to use termination couplings that are
designed for this type of installation.
These couplings are designed to make a
bond to the braid, which will complete the
metallic connection to the chassis.
2. Verify proper connection of the braided
shield to the galvanized side panels
located on the Quattro drive.
The Quattro DC drive requires EMC
Compliance (EN12015 and EN12016) to
function at the highest performance level
possible. The following pages will provide the
user with an installation guideline for field
personnel regarding proper metallic bonding
for EMC compliance. All necessary metallic
bonding within the Quattro cabinet will be
performed at the factory.
In order to be compliant with conducted and
radiated emissions standards, it is critical that
the motor leads are coupled correctly to the
chassis of the Quattro product. Ensuring
proper connections through the conduit plate
does this. The conduit plate is located on the
upper right hand corner of the cabinet.
Proper bonding of encoder cables and
communication wiring may be seen in. All
shielded multi-conductor cables used for
communications or for the encoder feedback
must be the braided type.
There are several places along the edge of the
lower part on the card cage near the customer
I/O board to mount a braided clamp.
Figure 17: Conduit Access
Proper bonding of motor wiring can be
achieved by using one of the following two
methods:
 Method 1:
1. Use rigid conduit combined with
appropriate conduit couplings for an
acceptable metallic bond to the conduit
plate. Note: The conduit can only contain
the armature and field lines. No
communication or encoder feedback wires
can be run through this conduit.
2. Verify proper conduit connections to the
galvanized side panels located on the
Quattro drive.
Encoder Cable
Figure 18: Encoder Cable Clamp
117
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Main Control Board – Power Supplies)
Part Number 46S03776-0020; Reference Designators A1 and A2
TPM6
+5V
TPM11
common
TPM10
common
TPM9
+2.5V
TPM8
+3.3V
TPM12
common
TPM7
+5V
TPM16
Encoder A
TPM14
Encoder Z
TPM13
common
TPM15
Encoder B
118
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Product Interface Board – Power Supplies)
Part Number 46S03954-0030; Reference Designators A3 and A4
TPP21
common
TPP17
+3.3V
TPP15
+5V
TPP28
-2.5V_REF
TPP20
+2.5V
TPP23
A_common
TPP31
-15V
TPP19
+5V_A
TPP27
C_24V
TPP26
-24VG
TPP18
+15V
TPP30
+3.3VA
TPP22
common
TPP14
+2.5V_R
TPP37
common
TPP13
+5V_R
TPP36
A_common
Use TPP21 or TPP22 or TPP37 (common) as common for the following testpoints:
TPP15 (+5V) TPP17 (+3.3V)
TPP20 (+2.5V)
Use TPP23 or TPP36 (A_Common) as common for the following testpoints:
TPP13 (+5V_REF)
TPP14 (+2.5V_REF)
TPP18 (+15V)
TPP19 (+5V_A)
TPP28 (-2.5V_REF)
TPP31 (-15V)
TPP30 (+3.3VA)
Use TPP27 (C_24V) as common for the following testpoints:
TPP24 (+24V)
119
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Product Interface Board – Other)
Part Number 46S03954-0030; Reference Designators A3 and A4
TPP2
Phase Y Current
TPP4
Field Current Out
TPP3
Phase Z Current
TPP1
Phase X Current
TPP32
INT_P1
TPP35
Bus Overvoltage
TPP33
DeSat
For Quattro
Platforms of Q2B,
set jumper J1 to
B. For all other
platforms, set J1
Jumper to A
TPP9
Module 1 Temp
TPP12
Field Module Temp
TPP34
Overcurrent
TPP5
Field Current In
TPP6
DC Bus Volts
120
J2-J4
Platforms of Q1, Q2A
Jumpers should be
installed on J2-J4. For
all other
Q2B,
J2-J4
platforms,
should J2not
J4 should
be
installed
not be
installed
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Product Interface Board - LED definitions)
Part Number 46S03954-0030; Reference Designators A3 and A4
The PWM product interface board has added LEDs for easier troubleshooting. Although the LEDs
have the same basic functionality on both the A3 and the A4, the referenced parts differ.
DS11
UTM indicator
DS4
Field IGBT gate firing indicator
DS10
Precharge contactor indicator
DS1-DS3
Utility / Motor Gate firing
indictators
DS9
DC Motor Voltage
DS5-DS7
Phase Current
DS8
Connector Fault






DS1-DS3 will be Amber when the appropriate gates are firing. On the line side Product Interface
Board, they refer to the line side IGBTs. On the motor side Product Interface Board, DS1-DS3 refer
to the motor IGBTs. Note: only DS1 and DS2 will be lit for motor side applications.
DS4 will be green when the drive is outputting low field current and orange when the drive is
outputting high current. DS4 is not used on the line side PI Board.
DS5-DS7 will be Amber in the line side PI Board when AC Current is flowing. Brightness is
proportional to load power. On the motor side PI Board, DS7 indicates current flowing through CT6
and DS6 indicates current flowing through CT5. Red shows negative current and green shows
positive current. DS5 is not used on the motor side PI Board.
DS8 will be red if any of the current sensor cables are disconnected. On the line side these include
the following current transducers: CT1, CT2, and CT3. On the motor side these include the following
current transducers: CT5 or CT5. This may also indicate JP7 is not properly connected.
DS9 on the line side PI board will be Amber when the 3-phase voltage is applied and sensed by the
drive. DS9 on the motor side PI Board will be green when the motor voltage is in reverse mode and
red in forward. Brightness is proportional to speed.
DS10-DS11 are only used on the line side PI Board.
121
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Power Distribution Board – Power Supplies)
Part Number 46S03862-0010; Reference Designator A10
TP4
-15V
TP1
+5V
TP3
+15V
TP2
common
TP5
+24V
TP6
+24V_common
122
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Gate Drive Board – LED definitions)
Part Number 46S04232-0010
The LEDs contained on the Gate Drive Board are for visual inspection only. This is for a secondary
reference to the gate firing LEDs on the Product Interface Board (see page 121). Note: the Amber
color will vary depending on the frequency of the PWM signal.
DS2
Green when ready
Amber when X Phase is firing
DS1
Green when ready
Amber when X Phase is firing
DS5
Green when ready
Amber when Y Phase is firing
123
Appendix – Testpoints
DS6
Green when ready
Amber when Y Phase is firing
DS4
Green when ready
Amber when Z Phase is firing
DS3
Green when ready
Amber when Z Phase is firing
124
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Customer Interface Board – Power Supplies)
Part Number 46S03950-0010; Reference Designator A6
TPC9
+3.3V
TPC8
+5V
TPC7
+5V
TPC13
+2.5V
TPC15
common
TPC16
C_analog
TPC10
+15V
TPC12
-15V
TPC14
common
Use TPC14 or TPC15 (common) as common for the following testpoints:
TPC7 (+5V)
TPC8 (+5V)
TPC9 (+3.3V)
TPC13 (+2.5V)
Use TPC16 (C_analog) as common for the following testpoints:
TPC10 (+15V)
TPC11 (+5V_A)
TPC12 (-15V)
125
TPC11
+5V_A
126
TPC35 Relay Output 1
TPC36 Relay Output 2
TPC30 Logic Output 5
TPC31 Logic Output 6
TPC32 Logic Output 7
TPC24 Logic Input 8
TPC22 Logic Input 6
TPC20 Logic Input 4
TPC18 Logic Input 2
TPC26 Logic Output 1
TPC27 Logic Output 2
TPC28 Logic Output 3
TPC29 Logic Output 4
TPC25 Logic Input 9
TPC23 Logic Input 7
TPC21 Logic Input 5
TPC19 Logic Input 3
TPC17 Logic Input 1
Appendix – Testpoints
Appendix
Testpoints (Customer Interface Board – Other)
Part Number 46S03950-0010; Reference Designator A6
TPC5 Analog Output 1
TPC6 Analog Output 2
TPC1 Analog Input 1
TPC2 Analog Output 2
TPC34 Solid State Relay Output 2
TPC33 Solid State Relay Output 1
Appendix – Control Power Consumption
Appendix
Control Power Consumption
Control Power (230VAC) consumption (max)*
Drive Model Number
kVA
Watts
Current (Amps)
QDC125-xxxx-xx
0.525
525
2.25
QDC150-xxxx-xx
0.525
525
2.25
QDC200-xxxx-xx
0.525
525
2.25
QDC250-xxxx-xx
0.600
600
2.6
QDC300-xxxx-xx
0.600
600
2.6
*Note: Does not include the Elevator Brake
Watts Loss
Drive Model Number
Total System Power Loss (max)**
no Auto Transformer
Total System Power Loss (max)**
with 480VAC:380VAC Auto Transformer
Watts
BTU
Watts
BTU
QDC125-xxxx-xx
2,500
8,600
3,000
10,000
QDC150-xxxx-xx
2,900
9,900
3,400
11,700
QDC200-xxxx-xx
3,700
12,500
4,400
14,900
QDC250-xxxx-xx
4,500
15,500
5,400
18,700
QDC300-xxxx-xx
5,350
18,300
6,400
21,700
**Note: Includes both Control Power and 3-Phase Input Power Consumption
Input / Output Ratings
Input
Output (rated max)
Drive Model Number
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
Power (kW)
QDC125-xxxx-xx
150 – 480
88
50 – 550
125
62.5
QDC150-xxxx-xx
150 – 480
106
50 – 550
150
75
QDC200-xxxx-xx
150 – 480
141
50 – 550
200
100
QDC250-xxxx-xx
150 – 480
176
50 – 550
250
125
QDC300-xxxx-xx
150 – 480
212
50 – 550
300
150
127
Appendix – Wire Terminal Specs
Appendix
Wire Terminal Specs
Power Terminals
English / Imperial Units
Drive
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Size
range
(awg)
Control Power
Terminals
(F1 & F2)
230VAC
Ground Terminals
Input Power
Terminals
TB1-1,2,3
PE
Lugs
Motor
Armature
Connections
ME1, ME3
Dynamic
Braking
Resistor
Connections
3-4
Motor Field
Terminals
TB3
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
range
range
range
range
range
range
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(in-lb)
(awg)
(awg)
(awg)
(awg)
(awg)
(awg)
125A
#6-350
MCM
275
#6-1/0
40
#6-350
MCM
275
#18-10
18
#6-350
MCM
275
#16-6
18
#12-2
30
150A
#6-350
MCM
275
#6-1/0
40
#6-350
MCM
275
#18-10
18
#6-350
MCM
275
#16-6
18
#12-2
30
200A
#6-350
MCM
275
#6-1/0
40
#6-350
MCM
275
#18-10
18
#6-350
MCM
275
#16-6
18
#12-2
30
250A
#6-350
MCM
275
#6-1/0
40
#6-350
MCM
275
#18-10
18
#6-350
MCM
275
#16-6
18
#12-2
30
300A
#6-350
MCM
275
#6-1/0
40
#6-350
MCM
275
#18-10
18
#6-350
MCM
275
#16-6
18
#12-2
30
Metric Units
Drive
Ampere
Rating
Wire
Size
range
(mm2)
Control Power
Terminals
(F1 & F2)
230VAC
Ground Terminals
Input Power
Terminals
TB1-1,2,3
PE
Lugs
Motor
Armature
Connections
ME1, ME3
Dynamic
Braking
Resistor
Connections
3-4
Motor Field
Terminals
TB3
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Wire
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Torque
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
Spec
range
range
range
range
range
range
(N-m)
(N-m)
(N-m)
(N-m)
(N-m)
(N-m)
(N-m)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
(mm2)
125A
10-175
31
10-50
4.5
10-175
31
0.6-4
2
10-120
13.6
0.9-10
2
2.5-25
3.4
150A
10-175
31
10-50
4.5
10-175
31
0.6-4
2
10-120
13.6
0.9-10
2
2.5-25
3.4
200A
10-175
31
10-50
4.5
10-175
31
0.6-4
2
10-120
13.6
0.9-10
2
2.5-25
3.4
250A
10-175
31
10-50
4.5
10-175
31
0.6-4
2
16-240
56.6
0.9-10
2
2.5-25
3.4
300A
10-175
31
10-50
4.5
10-175
31
0.6-4
2
16-240
56.6
0.9-10
2
2.5-25
3.4
Note: Additional ground terminal lugs are located at the top of the drive on right side of the chassis. These lugs will
accommodate ground wires in the range of #6-350MCM (10-175mm^2)
128
Appendix – Wire Terminal Specs
Appendix
Wire Terminal Specs
Customer Interface Board Terminals
English / Imperial Units
Drive Model
Number
Control Wiring Terminals
TB2
Control Wiring Terminals
TB1
Wire Size range
(AWG)
Torque Spec
(in-lb)
Wire Size range
(AWG)
Torque Spec
(in-lb)
QDC125-xxxx-xx
#16-#24
1.8-2.2
#14-#24
3.6-4.4
QDC150-xxxx-xx
#16-#24
1.8-2.2
#14-#24
3.6-4.4
QDC200-xxxx-xx
#16-#24
1.8-2.2
#14-#24
3.6-4.4
QDC250-xxxx-xx
#16-#24
1.8-2.2
#14-#24
3.6-4.4
QDC300-xxxx-xx
#16-#24
1.8-2.2
#14-#24
3.6-4.4
Metric Units
Drive Model
Number
Control Wiring Terminals
TB2
Control Wiring Terminals
TB1
Wire Size range
(mm2)
Torque Spec (Nm)
Wire Size range
(mm2)
Torque Spec (Nm)
QDC125-xxxx-xx
0.2-1.5
0.2-0.25
0.2-2.5
0.4-0.5
QDC150-xxxx-xx
0.2-1.5
0.2-0.25
0.2-2.5
0.4-0.5
QDC200-xxxx-xx
0.2-1.5
0.2-0.25
0.2-2.5
0.4-0.5
QDC250-xxxx-xx
0.2-1.5
0.2-0.25
0.2-2.5
0.4-0.5
QDC300-xxxx-xx
0.2-1.5
0.2-0.25
0.2-2.5
0.4-0.5
129
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Appendix
Dimensions / Weights Standard
Excluding customer I/O panel
Dimensions
Weight
Drive Model
Number
Height
Width
Depth
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
lbs
kg
QDC125-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
24
613
19
483
380
173
QDC150-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
24
613
19
483
380
173
QDC200-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
24
613
19
483
390
177
QDC250-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
24
613
19
483
410
186
QDC300-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
24
613
19
483
410
186
With Optional Customer I/O panel
Dimensions
Weight
Drive Model
Number
Height
Width
Depth
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
lbs
kg
QDC125-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
32
813
19
483
540
245
QDC150-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
32
813
19
483
540
245
QDC200-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
32
813
19
483
560
255
QDC250-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
32
813
19
483
580
264
QDC300-xxxx-xxx
72
1829
32
813
19
483
580
264
130
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions / Weights with Top Hat
On drives that require both the Auto Transformer option and the Dynamic Braking Resistor Option, the
Auto Transformer will be placed at the bottom of the cabinet and the Dynamic Braking Resistors will
be placed in a sheet metal box at the top of the drive.
Excluding customer I/O panel
Dimensions
Drive Model
Number
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
lbs
kg
QDC125-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
24
613
19
483
560
255
QDC150-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
24
613
19
483
560
255
QDC200-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
24
613
19
483
570
260
QDC250-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
24
613
19
483
590
268
QDC300-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
24
613
19
483
590
268
With Optional Customer I/O panel
Dimensions
Drive Model
Number
Weight*
Height
Width
Depth
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
lbs
kg
QDC125-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
32
813
19
483
720
327
QDC150-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
32
813
19
483
720
327
QDC200-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
32
813
19
483
740
336
QDC250-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
32
813
19
483
760
345
QDC300-xxxx-xxx
82.9
2140
32
813
19
483
760
345
*Includes Auto Transformer weight of ~130lbs
131
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Figure 19: Dimensions without optional Customer I/O Panel no Top Hat
132
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Figure 20: Dimensions with optional Customer I/O Panel no Top Hat
133
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Figure 21: Dimensions without optional Customer I/O Panel includes Top Hat
134
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Figure 22: Dimensions with optional Customer I/O Panel includes Top Hat
135
Appendix – Component Locations
Figure 23: Top Dimensions, no Customer I/O Panel
Figure 24: Bottom Dimensions, no Customer I/O Panel
136
Appendix – Dimensions and Weights
Figure 25: Top Dimensions, Customer I/O Panel
Figure 26: Bottom Dimensions, Customer I/O Panel
137
Appendix – Component Locations
Appendix
Component Locations
Optional
Control
Transformer
Optional Low Voltage
Field Supply or optional
Field Filter
Control Power Fuses
(F1 & F2) and Field
Supply fuses (F3 & F4)
3-Phase Input
Power and AC
input Fuses
Motor
Contactor (1M)
Motor Field
Controller (A24)
Control Power
EMI Filter
UTM
Electrical
Control Board
PCM
Bus Discharge
Relay
Line Side Converter
Motor Side Inverter
and Control
Electronics
Cooling Fans
Optional
Dynamic Braking
Resistors
Figure 27: Component Locations in Front of Drive
138
Appendix – Component Locations
Optional Control
Transformer
Bus Discharge
Resistor
AC Capacitor
Assembly
Optional Armature
Filter
Inductor
Line Side Converter
DC Bus Cap Board
Motor Side Inverter
Optional Dynamic
Braking Resistors
Figure 28: Component Locations with Front End Removed
139
Appendix – Component Locations
Line Side Main
Control Board (A1)
Line Side Product
Interface Board
(A3)
Line Side Cube I.D.
(A25A3JP10)
Magnetek
Operator
Status LEDs
Motor Side Cube
I.D. (A26A4JP10)
Power Distribution
PCB (A10)
Motor Side Product
Interface Board (A4)
Motor Side Main
Control Board (A2)
Customer Interface PCB
(A6)
Figure 29: Circuit Board Locations
140
Appendix – Component Locations
Current
Transducers
IGBT / Gate
Assembly
DC Bus
Capacitor PCB
Assembly
IGBT / Gate
Assembly
Figure 30: IGBT Heatsink Assembly
141
Appendix – Component Locations
A1
A2
1
5(+)
3
Optional Dynamic
Braking Resistor
2
6(-)
4
To Motor Inverter
Figure 31: Motor Contactor Connections
One of the troubleshooting tools provided by Quattro DC, is the ability
to view the Logic Inputs and Outputs by use of the LEDs on the
Customer I/O Board. The LED lit indicates a Logic Input of 1. This
does not take into consideration whether the input is set as Normal
Closed (see Submenu C2).
Logic State
Solid
Output1-2
Relay
7
Logic 1-2
Relay
Logic
Logic
Logic
Logic
Output
7
Input 1
Input 9
Output 1
TB1-48
TB1-25
RS422
TB1-1
TB1
TB2-8
TB1-24
TB2-14
TB2-7
TB2-1
TB2
Figure 32: Customer Input / Output Connections
142
Appendix – Low Voltage Field Module
Appendix
Low Voltage Field Module
Magnetek offers two version of the Field Module for Quattro™ DC. This document
details the appropriate use of each module.

The Low Voltage Field Module is recommended for applications with:
o 380-480 VAC 3-phase input to drive or 200-240 VAC 3-phase input to drive
when Field Current is less than 20 Amps
o Lower peak to peak and ground voltage on field when using higher input
voltage

The Standard Field Module is recommended for applications with:
o 200-480 VAC 3-phase input to drive where insulation stress is not a factor
o Applications that exceed output voltage/current rating of Low Voltage Field
Module1
Low Voltage Field Module Specifications
Input Power
Standards


Powered from the DC Bus
Output Power1


CSA
Design Features
20 Amps at 250 Volts
2

40kHz switching frequency
40 Amps at 125 Volts
2

Low Voltage to ground on field
winding insulation

Jumper on Field Module Board to
determine ampere range (see page 144 for
more information)
Standard Field Module Specifications
Input Power
Standards


Powered from the DC Bus
CSA
Output Power
Design Features


Settable switching frequency, FLD
CARRIER FRQ (A4)

Optional Field Filter helps with
high voltage peak to peak on field
winding insulation
Up to 40 Amps
143
Appendix – Input Voltage Requirements
Low Voltage Field Module Option Board
Due to the expanded options on the Low Voltage Field Module, 20 amps and 40
amps, slight setup is required. If the application is below the 20 Amp limitations, verify
the connector from the transformer is connected to J3-A, and the jumper on JP1 is
connected to A. If the application requires the 40 Amps, verify the connector from the
transformer is connected to J3-B and the JP1 connected to B.



Set
to A for 20A
PlugJP1
transformer
intoconnection
J3-A for 20 Amp
Set
JP1 to B(JP1
for 40A
connection
Connection
must
be set to A)
Plug transformer into J3-B for 40 Amp
Connection (JP1 must be set to B)
The J3-B is on the left and J3-A is on
the right
Set JP1 to A for 20A connection
Set JP1 to B for 40A connection
Use these formula’s to determine if the low voltage field module will operate in the application.
Calculate both Vbus and Vf,
Vin x 1.41 + (DC bus boost, default = 30) = Vbus
Field amps x Field Resistance = Vf
Where Vin is the AC voltage applied to the drive, this is either measured at the line fuses or in the
case the drive utilizes an auto transformer it would be the voltage applied to the drive from the
secondary.
Field amps are less than or equal to 20, then;
Vbus / 2 must be greater than or equal to (Vf x 1.5)
Field amps are greater than 20, then;
Vbus / 4 must greater than or equal to (Vf x 1.5)
If either the conditions are not true then the High voltage module must be used.
144
Appendix – Input Voltage Requirements
Appendix
Input Voltage Requirements
Quattro™ DC has an active front that can regulate DC motor voltage to be higher than
the nominal Vac line-to-line input. This application note shows how to determine the
minimum input line voltage required.
There are three limitations when determining nominal line-to-line voltage requirements
of a Quattro™ DC drive. Motor current, line amps, and motor voltage are all factors in
the voltage input requirement of the drive.
1. Select drive size to meet motor ampere requirements. Selections are 125A,
150A, 200A, 250A or 300A.
2. Perform Equation 1 and Equation 2 using Motor Voltage and Current the
motor needs to run at contract car speed with contract load in up direction
(Full Load Up Voltage and Current)
VL - L 
Motor Voltage  1.3 75
2
Equation 1: Nominal Line-to-line Voltage
VL - L   Rated Motor Current  Motor Voltage  0.92

Rated Drive Amps



Equation 2: Nominal Line-to-line Voltage
Where: VL-L = Nominal Input Line-to-Line Voltage
Drive Amps = Current Rating of Quattro™ DC (125A, 150A, 200A, 250A, or 300A)
Rated Motor Current = Armature Motor Current required to go contract speed and load up
Rated Motor Voltage = Armature Motor Voltage required to go contract speed and
load up
3. Use the LARGER of the values from Equation 1 and Equation 2. Note: This
value must be lower than 480VAC due to input limitations of the drive.
Example:
Rated Motor Run Current
115A
Rated Full Load Motor Voltage 460VDC
Drive Current Rating
125A
VL - L 
460  1.3 75
2
; VL - L  370 VAC
VL - L   115  460  0.92

125

 ;

VL - L  389 VAC
Therefore, the drive requires a minimum nominal voltage of 389VAC on the input to
run a motor with the Rated Full Load Motor Voltage of 460VDC and rated current of
115A.
145
Appendix – Input Voltage Requirements
Below are five graphical representations of what each drive size is capable of producing in
relationship to Rated Motor Current and commonly supplied nominal line-to-line VAC input to
drive.
Figure 33: 125A Application Guide
Figure 34: 150A Application Guide
146
Appendix – Input Voltage Requirements
Figure 35: 200A Application Guide
Figure 36: 250A Application Guide
147
Appendix – Input Voltage Requirements
Figure 37: 300A Application Guide
148
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Appendix
Spare Parts OTIS Quattro DC Drive
Description
Pictorial
Reference
Drive Reference
Rating Designator
Magnetek kit
Number
Quantity
Per
Drive
Main Control PCB (Line
Side)
Controls line side power
conversion
ALL
A1
LA46S03776-2110
1
Main Control PCB (Motor
Side)
Controls Motor Side
Conversion
ALL
A2
LA46S03776-0210
1
Product Interface PCB
1. Kit contains 1.0 PCB
2. These PCB's are
interchangeable except
for the cube I.D's
Converts signals from the
respective main control
boards to drive hardware
ALL
A3, A4
LA46S03954-0020
2
ALL
A5
LA05P00090-0668
1
ALL
A6
LA46S03950-0010
1
ALL
A8
LA46S04174-0010
1
Power Distribution PCB
Distributes voltage from the
Power Supply (A5)
ALL
A10
LA46S03862-0010
1
DC Bus Cap Board
Bus Filter Capacitors
ALL
A17
LA46S04259-0010
1
Power Supply
Provides low voltage control
power
Customer Interface PCB
Contains customer inputs
and outputs
Voltage Feedback PCB
Contains line and motor
sense and Pre-charge control
relay logic
149
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Magnetek kit
Number
Quantity
Per
Drive
A24
LA46S03829-0100
1
A24
LA46S03829-0200
1
125A
A25
LA46S04187-1550
1
150A
A25
LA46S04187-1570
1
200A
A25
LA46S04187-1670
1
250A
A25
LA46S04187-1690
1
300A
A25
LA46S04187-1710
1
125A
A26
LA46S04187-1560
1
150A
A26
LA46S04187-1580
1
200A
A26
LA46S04187-1680
1
250A
A26
LA46S04187-1700
1
300A
A26
LA46S04187-1720
1
Cube ID PCB (Line Side)
Defines size of drive and
gives the Product Interface
Board (A3) its identification.
Important note: These will
only work with the LF Series
transducers.
125A
A25
LA46S04187-2550
1
150A
A25
LA46S04187-2570
1
200A
A25
LA46S04187-2670
1
250A
A25
LA46S04187-2690
1
300A
A25
LA46S04187-2710
1
Cube ID PCB (Motor Side)
Defines size of drive and
gives the Product Interface
Board (A4) its identification.
Important note: These will
only work with the LF Series
transducers.
125A
A26
LA46S04187-2560
1
150A
A26
LA46S04187-2580
1
200A
A26
LA46S04187-2680
1
250A
A26
LA46S04187-2700
1
300A
A26
LA46S04187-2720
1
AC Capacitor Assembly
Along with the L1 Inductor,
creates a filter to minimize
harmonics and better the
power factor
125A
C1, C2, C3
LA05P00003-0485
3
150A
C1, C2, C3
LA05P00003-0485
3
200A
C1, C2, C3
LA05P00003-0486
3
250A
C1, C2, C3
LA05P00003-0486
3
300A
C1, C2, C3
LA05P00003-0486
3
Description
Field Control Module
Motor Shunt Field Regulator
Kit will include the F3, F4
fuses for both the standard
field module and the low
voltage field module
Pictorial
Reference
Drive Reference
Rating Designator
ALL
Standard
Field
Module
ALL
Low
Voltage
Field
Module
Cube ID PCB (Line Side)
Defines size of drive and
gives the Product Interface
Board (A3) its identification
Cube ID PCB (Motor Side)
Defines size of drive and
gives the Product Interface
Board (A4) its identification
150
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Description
Pictorial
Reference
Drive Reference
Rating Designator
Magnetek kit
Number
Quantity
Per
Drive
Control Fuses
(Kit will contain 2.0 fuses)
230VAC Control Power
Fuses
ALL
F1, F2
LA05P00017-0565
2
Control Fuse Fuse Blocks
(Kit will contain 2.0 blocks)
230VAC Control Fuse Fuse
Blocks
ALL
F1, F2
LA05P00019-0163
2
125A
L1
LA05P00010-0651
1
150A
L1
LA05P00010-0651
1
200A
L1
LA05P00010-0652
1
250A
L1
LA05P00010-0670
1
300A
L1
LA05P00010-0670
1
ALL
A23
LA46S04262-0010
1
ALL
L3
LA05P00010-0586
1
ALL
L4
LA46S04069-0020
1
125A
L5
LA46S04068-2125
1
150A
L5
LA46S04068-2150
200A
L5
LA46S04068-2200
1
250A
L5
LA46S04068-2250
1
300A
L5
LA46S04068-2300
ALL
DCHG
LA05P00037-0311
1
125A
1M
LA05P00032-0154
1
150A
1M
LA05P00032-0154
1
200A
1M
LA05P00032-0154
1
250A
1M
LA05P00032-0155
1
300A
1M
LA05P00032-0156
1
Inductor
Along with the AC Capacitor
Assembly, creates a filter to
minimize harmonics and
better the power factor
Filter Board
Filter for reduction of RFI/EMI
to and from the drive and the
line utility
Control Power EMI Filter
Filter for reduction of RFI/EMI
to and from the drive and the
230VAC Control Power
Field Filter
Field dV/dT Filter including
wiring
Armature Filter
Armature dV/dT Filter
including wiring
DC bus discharge
contactor
Contactor used to discharge
the bus when the drive is no
longer boosting
DC Output Contactor
Motor Armature Contactor
(ME)
151
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Description
Pictorial
Reference
DC Output Contactor
Auxiliaries
(1NO 13,14 / 1NC 21,22)
DC Output Contactor
Auxiliaries
(2NO 43,44 / 2NC 31,32)
DC Output Contactor Coils
ABB220,280 240Vac
DC Output Contactor Coil
ABB360 240Vac
OPTION: Dual auxiliary
Allows the motor contactor
auxiliaries to be in parallel.
This adds to the reliability
of the contactor confirm.
Contains;
Wiring harness
CAL16-11C (1NO 53,54 /
1NC 61,62)
CAL16-11D (1NO 83,84 /
1NC 71,72)
Installation instructions
Drive Reference
Rating Designator
Magnetek kit
Number
Quantity
Per
Drive
ALL
1M AUX
LA05P00054-0239
1
ALL
1M AUX
LA05P00054-0240
1
125A250A
1M Coil,
240Vac
LA05P00032-0207
1
300A
1M Coil,
240Vac
LA05P00032-0219
1
ALL
1M AUX. RH
LH mount
LA46S04453-0200
1
Current transducer
Contains one device, to order
the replacement part your CT
must look like this. If it
doesn’t refer to the upgrade
kit. It is not possible to mix
and match the LA and LF
series transducers.
Current feedback
transducer upgrade kit;
Contains; cube I.D. boards,
five sensors, cables and
adaptor plate. The new LF
style transducer shown in the
top view, was introduced in
early 2012 and has the LEM
P/N LF…, the LA style which
has been used up to that
point is in the lower view, this
125200A
LA05P00217-0091
1, 2, 3, 5, 6CT
LF series
250300A
125200A
LF series
152
5
LA05P00217-0092
1, 2, 3, 5, 6CT
LA05P00217-1091
1
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Description
Pictorial
Reference
Drive Reference
Rating Designator
Magnetek kit
Number
Quantity
Per
Drive
item will no longer be
available as a spare part.
250300A
LA05P00217-1092
LA series
Precharge Contactor
Pre-charge Contactor
ALL
PCM
LA05P00037-0312
1
Touch Safe cover for the line
terminals
All
LA46S04453-0010
1
Touch Safe cover for the 3Phase Auto transformer
All
LA46S04453-0020
1
LA05P00032-0201
LA05P00032-0201
LA05P00032-0201
LA05P00032-0202
LA05P00032-0202
1
1
1
1
1
Line Contactor
230VAC Control Power Line
Contactor
125A
150A
200A
250A
300A
153
UTM
UTM
UTM
UTM
UTM
Appendix – Spare Parts List
IGBT Assembly only
Includes:
1. IGBT and gate PCB
and gate power
harness.
2. The kit will contain
instruction and tools
to change just the
IGBT and re-install
back onto the
heatsink.
3. This kit does not
include the heatsink
it is shown for
illustration purposes
only.
AC Input Fuses
Replacement fuses for the
AC input to the drive. Kit
contains 3 fuses.
125A
Line Side
LA46S04256-5125
1
125A
Motor Side
LA46S04256-6125
1
150A
Line Side
LA46S04256-5150
1
150A
Motor Side
LA46S04256-6150
1
200A
Line Side
LA46S04256-5200
1
200A
Motor Side
LA46S04256-6200
1
250A
Line Side
LA46S04256-5250
1
250A
Motor Side
LA46S04256-6250
1
300A
Line Side
LA46S04256-5300
1
300A
Motor Side
LA46S04256-6300
1
300A
Motor Side
LA46S03825-7300
1
125A
150A
LF1-LF3
LF1-LF3
LA46S04305-0125
LA46S04305-0150
1
1
200A
LF1-LF3
LA46S04305-0200
1
250A
LF1-LF3
LA46S04305-0250
1
300A
LF1-LF3
LA46S04305-0300
1
154
Appendix – Spare Parts List
Door Filter, 18 x 9.5
Disposable air filter located in
the door
ALL
FLTR1
LA05P00015-0049
1
ALL
F3, F4
LA05P00017-0597
2
125A
-
LA46S04263-1100
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1110
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1120
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1130
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1140
1
125A
-
LA46S04263-1101
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1111
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1121
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1131
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1141
1
125A
-
LA46S04263-1103
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1113
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1123
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1133
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1143
1
125A
-
LA46S04263-1104
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1114
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1124
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1134
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1144
1
Auto Transformer
(380/400/415:480)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 380/400/415VAC
primary, 480VAC secondary
50/60Hz.
125A
-
LA46S04263-1105
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1115
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1125
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1135
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1145
1
Auto Transformer (575:480)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 575VAC primary,
480VAC secondary, 60Hz.
125A
-
LA46S04263-1106
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1116
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1126
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1136
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1146
1
Low Voltage Field Supply
Fuses
Kit contains 2.0 fuses. 30A,
700VAC Semiconductor
fuses
All Auto Transformer kits
contain power cables and
fuse hardware modification
kit.
Auto Transformer (480:380)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 480VAC primary,
380VAC secondary, 60Hz.
Auto Transformer (575:380)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 575VAC primary,
380VAC secondary, 60Hz.
Auto Transformer
(208/240:380)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 208/240VAC primary,
380VAC secondary, 60Hz.
Auto Transformer
(208/240:480)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 208/240VAC primary,
480VAC secondary, 60Hz.
155
Appendix – Spare Parts List
125A
-
LA46S04263-1107
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1117
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1127
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1137
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1147
1
125A
-
LA46S04263-1108
1
150A
-
LA46S04263-1118
1
200A
-
LA46S04263-1128
1
250A
-
LA46S04263-1138
1
300A
-
LA46S04263-1148
1
ALL
Low
Voltage
Field
Module
LA05P00058-1170
1
ALL
LA05P00016-0107
2
Field module fan
Cools heatsink of the Field
Supply
ALL
LA46S04186-0010
1
Operator Keypad
Drive Programming Tool
ALL
ELEV-ELOP
1
Auto Transformer (600:380)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 600VAC primary,
380VAC secondary, 60Hz.
Auto Transformer (600:480)
Optional Transformer input to
drive. 600VAC primary,
480VAC secondary, 60Hz.
Field Control Module
Low Voltage Field Module
Transformer
Blower Module
230 VAC Cooling Fan
Operator Extension Cord
6 foot extension cable for
operator
Software Flash Drive
Contains Magnetek Explorer,
LS and MS Quattro Code and
the latest tech manual.
Lifting Kit
Optional Lifting Kit includes
qty (4) M8 Eyebolts and
instructional sheet
Touchup Paint
Aerosol spray can
ALL
-
ELEV-CABLE
1
ALL
-
46S04413-DU02
1
QDC2-LIFTKIT
1
05P00100-0092
-
ALL
Spray can
ALL
-
DC Output filters are available in the following 4
configurations
Optional DC Output Filters are designed to
1. Armature and field filter mounted on a suboffer an additional level of protection to existing
DC machines in a modernization project. The
panel for mounting internal to the Quattro DC
DC filters are designed to provide a reduction
Cabinet **
in the change in voltage with respect to time
2. Armature and field filter mounted in a
(dv/dt) of 500V/micro second or less as
standalone NEMA 1 enclosure for locating
recommended by the NEMA MG-1 Motor &
external to the Quattro DC Cabinet **
Generator design guide.
3. Armature only filter mounted on a sub-panel
for mounting internal to the Quattro DC
Cabinet **
DC output filter
156
Appendix – Spare Parts List
4. Armature only filter mounted in a standalone
NEMA 1 enclosure for locating external to the
Quattro DC Cabinet **
** Can be located in the location under the autotransformer if it isn’t installed. Otherwise, refer to the
standalone NEMA 1 options.
QDC-0125-01
-
125A
Panel only, field and armature
QDC-1125-01
-
125A
NEMA Enclosed, field and armature
QDC-2125-01
-
125A
Panel only, armature
QDC-3125-01
-
125A
NEMA Enclosed, armature
QDC-0150-01
-
150A
Panel only, field and armature
QDC-1150-01
-
150A
NEMA Enclosed, field and armature
QDC-2150-01
-
150A
Panel only, armature
QDC-3150-01
-
150A
NEMA Enclosed, armature
QDC-0200-01
-
200A
Panel only, field and armature
QDC-1200-01
-
200A
NEMA Enclosed, field and armature
QDC-2200-01
-
200A
Panel only, armature
QDC-3200-01
-
200A
NEMA Enclosed, armature
QDC-0250-01
-
250A
Panel only, field and armature
QDC-1250-01
-
250A
NEMA Enclosed, field and armature
QDC-2250-01
-
250A
Panel only, armature
QDC-3250-01
-
250A
NEMA Enclosed, armature
QDC-0300-01
-
300A
Panel only, field and armature
QDC-1300-01
-
300A
NEMA Enclosed, field and armature
QDC-2300-01
-
300A
Panel only, armature
QDC-3300-01
-
300A
NEMA Enclosed, armature
157
Index
A A0 - Adjust Menu ............................................. 33–55
A1 - Drive Submenu ........................................ 33–42
A2 - S-Curves Submenu ................................. 43–44
A3 - Multistep Ref Submenu ........................... 45–46
A4 - Motor Side Pwr Convert Submenu .......... 47–48
A5 - Line Side Pwr Convert Submenu ............. 49–50
A6 - Motor Parameters Submenu .................... 51–55
AB Off Delay parameter ........................................ 38
AB Zero Spd Lev parameter .................................. 38
Accel Jerk In parameters....................................... 44
Accel Jerk Out parameters .................................... 44
Accel Rate parameters .......................................... 44
Adjust A0 Menu ...................... See A0 - Adjust Menu
Alarm logic output ................................................. 70
Alarm+Flt logic output ........................................... 70
Ana x Out Gain parameter .................................... 37
Ana x Out Offset parameter .................................. 37
Analog Velocity Follower ....................................... 25
Anti-Rollback (ARB) ............................................ 113
ARB Adjustment Hints And Cautions .................. 114
ARB Select User Switch ........................................ 64
Arm Current analog output .................................... 72
Arm Current display value ..................................... 76
Arm Inductance parameter .................................... 47
Arm Resistance parameter .................................... 47
Arm Voltage analog output .................................... 72
Arm Voltage display value ..................................... 76
Armature Cur Err display value ............................. 76
Armature IR Drop parameter ................................. 51
Armature Meas IRDrop parameter ........................ 76
Armature Voltage Feedback .................................. 26
Armature Voltage parameter ................................. 51
Auto Brake logic output ......................................... 70
Auto Field Res display value ................................. 76
Auto Field TC display value ................................... 76
Auto Meas Arm L display value ............................. 76
Auto Meas Arm R display value ............................ 76
Auto Stop user switch............................................ 63
Auto Tune Procedure .......................................... 110
Automatic Fault Reset ........................................... 59
Aux Torq Cmd analog output ................................ 72
Aux Torque Cmd display value ............................. 73
B Base Enable Opnd Fault ....................................... 88
Brake Hold logic output ......................................... 70
Brake Hold Src user switch ................................... 60
Brake Hold Time parameter .................................. 35
Brake Pick Cnfm user switch ................................. 60
Brake Pick logic output .......................................... 70
Brake Pick Src user switch .................................... 60
Brake Pick Time parameter ................................... 34
Bridge Ground Fault .............................................. 88
Brk Hold Flt ........................................................... 89
Brk Hold Flt Ena user switch ................................. 60
Brk Hold Flt logic output ........................................ 70
Brk Pick Flt ............................................................ 89
Brk Pick Flt Ena user switch .................................. 60
Brk Pick Flt logic output ......................................... 70
Bus voltage analog output ..................................... 72
Bus VRef Source parameter ................................. 49
C C0 - Configure Menu ....................................... 56–72
C1 - User Switches Submenu ......................... 56–66
C2 – Logic Inputs Submenu ............................ 68–69
C3 - Logic Outputs Submenu .......................... 70–71
C4 - Analog Outputs Submenu ............................. 72
Car Going Dwn logic output .................................. 70
Car Going Up logic output ..................................... 70
Center Frequency - Notch Filter ............................ 42
Changing Carrier Frequency ................................. 48
Charge Flt logic output .......................................... 70
Charge Light Locations ......................................... 86
Check Setup Flt..................................................... 89
Close Contact logic output .................................... 70
Component Locations - 125A .............................. 137
Configure C0 Menu ......................................... 56–72
Cont Confirm Src user switch ................................ 58
Contact Cfrm logic input ........................................ 69
Contact Flt Time parameter .................................. 34
Contactor DO Dly parameter ................................. 38
Contactor Flt ......................................................... 90
Contactor Flt logic output ...................................... 70
Contract Car Speed parameter ............................. 33
Contract Mtr Spd parameter .................................. 33
Ctr Pwr Sense logic input ...................................... 69
Cube Data Flt ........................................................ 90
Cube ID Fault ........................................................ 90
Curr Reg Flt .......................................................... 91
Curr Reg Flt logic output ....................................... 70
Current Limit parameter ........................................ 33
Customer I/O Board ............................................ 141
Customer Input/Output Connections ................... 141
D D0 - Display D0 Menu ..................................... 73–77
D1 - Elevator Data Submenu .......................... 73–75
D2 - MS Power Data Submenu ............................. 76
D3 - LS Power Data Submenu .............................. 77
DC Bus Reg I Gain parameter .............................. 49
DC Bus Reg P Gain parameter ............................. 49
DC Bus V Boost parameter ................................... 49
DC Bus Volts display value ................................... 77
DC Bus Volts Ref display value............................. 77
DCU Data Flt ......................................................... 91
Decel Jerk In parameters ...................................... 44
Decel Jerk Out parameters ................................... 44
Decel Rate parameters ......................................... 44
Dimensions ................................................... 117–25
Dir Confirm user switch ......................................... 61
Dir Conflict ............................................................ 91
Drive Enable logic input ........................................ 69
Drive Temp. Fault............................................ 91, 95
Drv Overload logic output ...................................... 70
DS Module Temp display value............................. 76
DSPR Enable user switch ..................................... 64
DSPR Time parameter .......................................... 40
E H Elevator Speed Regulator ..................................... 66
EMC Compliance ................................................ 116
Enc Ratio Mult parameter...................................... 35
Encode Speed display value ................................. 76
Encoder Connect user switch ................................ 58
Encoder Flt ............................................................ 93
Encoder Flt logic output......................................... 70
Encoder Pulses parameter .................................... 35
EReg ........................ See Elevator Speed Regulator
Est Inertia display value ........................................ 73
Est Motor Spd analog output ................................. 72
Est Spd Fdbk display value ................................... 76
Ext Torq Cmd Src user switch ............................... 61
Ext Torque Bias parameter ................................... 36
Ext Torque Mult parameter .................................... 36
Extrn Fault 1 .......................................................... 93
Extrn Fault 2 .......................................................... 93
Extrn Fault 3 .......................................................... 94
Extrn Fault 4 .......................................................... 94
Extrn Fault logic input ............................................ 69
Hi/Lo Gain Src user switch .................................... 57
High / Low Gain Source ........................................ 65
Hit Torque Limit ..................................................... 97
HW/SW Mismatch Fault ........................................ 97
F F0 - Fault Menu ............................................... 83–85
F1 - Active Faults Submenu .................................. 84
F2 - Fault History ................................................... 85
F2 - Fault History Submenu .................................. 85
Fault logic output ................................................... 70
Fault Reset ............................................................ 59
Fault Reset logic input ........................................... 69
Fault Reset Src user switch................................... 59
Faults, Troubleshooting Guide ...................... 88–109
Field Current analog output ................................... 72
Field Current display value .................................... 76
Field Ena Source user switch ................................ 56
Field Enable logic input ......................................... 69
Field Ground Fault................................................. 94
Field I Reg Fault .................................................... 94
Field IGBT Fault .................................................... 94
Field IGBT Temp display value ............................. 76
Field Loss Fault ..................................................... 95
Field Overcurrent Fault.......................................... 96
Fld Carrier Frq parameter ...................................... 48
Fld Cur Set Hi Flt ................................................... 95
Fld PWM Set Hi Flt ................................................ 96
Flt Reset Delay parameter .................................... 37
Flt Resets / Hour parameter .................................. 37
Flux Cnfmr Level parameter .................................. 51
Flux Confirm logic output....................................... 71
Full Fld Current parameter .................................... 51
Full Fld Time Fault................................................. 96
FullFldFaultTime parameter .................................. 40
G Gain Bandwidth A parameter ................................ 48
Gain Bandwidth F parameter ................................ 48
Gain Chng Level parameter .................................. 33
Gain Reduce Mult parameter ................................ 33
Gain Selection parameter...................................... 47
Gate Alarm ............................................................ 96
Ground Fault logic output ...................................... 71
I ID Reg Integral Gain parameter ............................ 49
ID Reg Prop Gain parameter ................................ 49
In Low Gain logic output ........................................ 71
Inertia Calculation ............................................... 112
Inertia parameter ................................................... 33
Initial L Freq parameter ......................................... 49
Inner Loop Xover parameter ................................. 33
Input Hz display value ........................................... 77
Input L-L Volts parameter ...................................... 49
Input Vab display value ......................................... 77
Input Vca display value ......................................... 77
Internal Preset Speed & Profile Generator ............ 25
Invalid Checksum .................................................. 97
IP Comm Fault ...................................................... 97
IQ Reg Integral Gain parameter ............................ 49
IQ Reg Prop Gain parameter ................................ 49
L LEDs - Front Cover ............................................... 27
Line Hi Volts Fault ................................................. 97
Logic Input parameters ......................................... 68
Logic Input Wiring ................................................. 18
Logic Inputs display............................................... 74
Logic Output Wiring............................................... 21
Logic Outputs display ............................................ 74
Low Gain Sel logic input ........................................ 69
LS A to D Fault ...................................................... 97
LS AC Cntcr Fault ................................................. 97
LS Bridge Gnd Fault.............................................. 97
LS Charge Fault .................................................... 98
LS Chk Setup Fault ............................................... 98
LS Cube Data Fault............................................... 98
LS Cube ID Fault................................................... 98
LS Curr Reg Fault ................................................. 99
LS DCU Data Fault ............................................... 99
LS Hit Current Lmt Alarm ...................................... 99
LS HW/SW Fault ................................................... 99
LS I Conn Off Flt ................................................... 99
LS IGBT Fault ..................................................... 100
LS IP Comm Fault ............................................... 100
LS Module Temp display value ............................. 76
LS Overcurr Fault ................................................ 100
LS Overload Fault ............................................... 100
LS Overtemp ....................................................... 101
LS Overvolt Fault ................................................ 101
LS PCU Data Flt.................................................. 101
LS Phase Fault.................................................... 101
LS Power Data D3 submenu ................................. 77
LS PWM Frequency parameter ............................. 50
LS Pwr Input display value .................................... 77
LS Size Fault ....................................................... 102
LS SW Bus OV Fault........................................... 102
LS Undr Voltg Alarm ........................................... 102
LS Undrvolt Fault ................................................ 102
M Maintenance, General ........................................... 86
Mech Brk Hold logic input...................................... 69
Mech Brk Pick logic input ...................................... 69
Menus ................................................................... 28
Module A,B IGBT ................................................ 103
Monitor Rev ......................................................... 103
Motor Contactor Connections .............................. 141
Motor Field Res parameter .................................... 47
Motor Field TC parameter ..................................... 47
Motor ID Flt ......................................................... 103
Motor ID parameter ............................................... 51
Motor Mode analog output .................................... 72
Motor Mode display value ..................................... 76
Motor Rotation user switch .................................... 58
Motor Side Power Data D2 Submenu ................... 76
Motor Speed display value .................................... 73
Motor Trq Lim logic output ..................................... 71
MS Bus Voltage display value ............................... 76
MS I Conn Off Flt ................................................ 103
MS Size Fault ...................................................... 104
MS-LS Mismatch Flt ............................................ 103
Mtr Data Fault ..................................................... 104
Mtr Overload ....................................................... 104
Mtr Overload logic output ...................................... 71
Mtr Rev Vlt Lim parameter .................................... 47
Mtr Settings Fault ................................................ 104
Multi-Step Speed Command Debounce ................ 45
Multi-Step Speed Command Selection.................. 45
Parameter Tree ......................................... 28, 31–32
PCU Data Flt ....................................................... 106
Phase Fault logic output ........................................ 71
PI Speed Regulator ............................................... 66
PLL Filter FC parameter ........................................ 50
Pole Filter parameter............................................. 50
Pre Chge Thresh parameter ................................. 50
Pre Torque Time parameter .................................. 36
Pre-Torq Last display value .................................. 73
PreTorque Latch user switch ................................ 59
PreTorque Ref analog output ................................ 72
Pre-Torque Ref display value ................................ 73
PreTorque Source user switch .............................. 58
Pre-Trq Latch logic input ....................................... 69
Priority Message user switch ................................ 62
PTorq Latch Clck user switch ................................ 59
PWM Freq parameter ............................................ 48
R No Drv Handshake .............................................. 104
No Field Cable Flt................................................ 105
No Function logic input .......................................... 69
No Function logic output........................................ 71
Not Alarm logic output ........................................... 71
Notch Filt Depth parameter ................................... 39
Notch Filter ............................................................ 42
Notch Filter Frq parameter .................................... 39
Ramp Down En Src user switch ............................ 60
Ramp Down Ena logic output ................................ 71
Ramped Stop Sel user switch ............................... 60
Ramped Stop Time parameter .............................. 34
Rated Motor Curr parameter ................................. 51
Ready 2 Start logic output ..................................... 71
Ready to Run logic output ..................................... 71
Ready, Waiting for Drive ..................................... 106
Regen Trq Lim logic output ................................... 71
Relay Coils ............................................................ 70
Response parameter............................................. 33
Reversed Tach Fault ............................................. 93
Run Command Src user switch ............................. 56
Run Commanded logic output ............................... 71
Run Confirm logic output ....................................... 71
Run Delay Timer ................................................... 38
Run Delay Timer parameter .................................. 38
Run Down logic input ............................................ 69
Run logic input ...................................................... 69
Run Up logic input ................................................. 69
RX Logic Input display .......................................... 75
O S Open Armature Flt ............................................... 105
Ospd Test Src logic input ...................................... 69
Overcurr Flt ......................................................... 105
Overcurr Flt logic output ........................................ 71
Overspd Test Src user switch ............................... 60
Overspeed Flt ...................................................... 105
Overspeed Flt logic output .................................... 71
Overspeed Level parameter .................................. 35
Overspeed Mult parameter .................................... 35
Overspeed Time parameter .................................. 35
Overtemp Flt ......................................................... 92
Overtemp Flt logic output ...................................... 71
Overvolt Flt .......................................................... 106
Overvolt Flt logic output......................................... 71
Ovld Start Level parameter ................................... 52
Ovld Time Out parameter ...................................... 52
OVLD TIME OUT parameter ................................. 54
Ovrtemp Alarm logic output ................................... 71
Save Field Res parameter .................................... 53
Save Field TC parameter ...................................... 53
Save IR Drop parameter ....................................... 53
Save Meas Arm L parameter ................................ 53
Save Meas Arm R parameter ................................ 53
S-Chain Event ..................................................... 106
S-Curve Abort user switch .................................... 62
S-Curve Sel logic input .......................................... 69
Selecting Logic Input Definitions ........................... 68
Ser2 Insp Ena logic input ...................................... 69
Serial Link Follower ............................................... 25
Set-Up And Tuning Of Anti-Rollback ................... 113
Setup Flt .............................................................. 107
SFT CN NOT CLOSED fault ............................... 108
SFT CN OPENED fault ....................................... 107
Solid State Relays ................................................. 70
Spd Command Bias parameter ............................. 36
Spd Command Mult parameter ............................. 36
Spd Command Src user switch ............................. 56
Spd Dev Hi Level parameter ................................. 36
Spd Dev Lo Level parameter ................................ 35
N P Parameter Reference .......................................... 3–9
Spd Dev Time parameter ...................................... 36
Spd Modefilt BW parameter .................................. 48
Spd Phase Margin parameter ............................... 34
Spd Ref Release user switch ................................ 58
Spd Reg Torq Cmd display value .......................... 73
Spd Rg Tq Cmd analog output .............................. 72
Speed Command analog output ............................ 72
Speed Command parameters ............................... 46
Speed Dev logic output ......................................... 71
Speed Dev Low logic output.................................. 71
Speed Dev Low/High Level ................................... 41
Speed Error analog output .................................... 72
Speed Error display value ..................................... 73
Speed Feedback display value ............................. 73
Speed Feedbk analog output ................................ 72
Speed Ref analog output....................................... 72
Speed Ref Rls logic output .................................... 71
Speed Reference display value ............................. 73
Speed Reg Rls logic output ................................... 71
Speed Reg Type user switch ................................ 57
SRL TIMEOUT Fault ........................................... 108
Standby Field parameter ....................................... 51
Startup Guide ........................................................ 13
Status LEDs .......................................................... 27
Step Ref Bx logic input .......................................... 69
Stndby Fld Time parameter ................................... 39
Stopping Mode user switch ................................... 62
SW Bus OV Level parameter ................................ 49
T Tach Filter BW parameter ..................................... 34
Tach Filter user switch .......................................... 58
Tach Rate Cmd analog output .............................. 72
Tach Rate Cmd display value ............................... 73
Tach Rate Gain parameter .................................... 34
Tach Speed analog output .................................... 72
Tach Speed Sense parameter .............................. 52
Tach Volt Sense parameter ................................... 52
Testpoints - Customer Interface Board.......... 124–25
Testpoints - Main Control Board .......................... 117
Testpoints - Power Distribution Board ......... 121, 124
Testpoints - Product Interface Board ............. 118–24
Torque Ref analog output ..................................... 72
Torque Ref display value ...................................... 76
Torque Specs .............................................. 127, 128
Troubleshooting ............................................ 87–109
Trq Lim Msg Dly parameter ................................... 38
Trq Ramp Down logic input ................................... 69
U U0 - Utility Menu.............................................. 78–83
U1 - Password Submenu ...................................... 79
U2 - Hidden Items Submenu ................................. 79
U3 - Units Submenu .............................................. 79
U4 - Overspeed Test Submenu............................. 79
U5 - Restore Parameter Defaults Submenu .......... 80
U6 - Drive Info Submenu ................................. 81, 83
U7 - Hex Monitor Submenu ................................... 83
Undervolt Flt ........................................................ 108
Undervolt Flt logic output ...................................... 71
Up to Spd Level parameter ................................... 38
Up to Speed logic output ....................................... 71
Up/Dwn logic input ................................................ 69
Up/Dwn Threshold parameter ............................... 37
User Switches C1 Submenu ........................... 56–66
Util Data Sum Flt ................................................. 109
Utility Temp Flt .................................................... 109
Utility U0 Menu .......................... See U0 - Utility Menu
UV Alarm ............................................................. 109
UV Alarm Level parameter .................................... 48
UV Alarm logic output ........................................... 71
UV Fault Level parameter ..................................... 48
W Weak Fld Current parameter ................................. 51
Weights ............................................................... 129
Wire Terminal Specs ................................... 127, 128
Z Zero Speed Level parameter ................................ 37
Zero Speed logic output ........................................ 71
Zero Speed Time parameter ................................. 37
NOTES:
QUATTRO DC
Data subject to change without notice. Quattro is a trademark of Magnetek, Inc.
Magnetek Elevator Products
W50 N13605 Overview Drive
Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin 53051
(800) 236-1705, (262) 252-6999, FAX (262) 790-4142
http://www.elevatordrives.com
TM7337  2016 Magnetek, Inc. Feb 2016 rev 16
Magnetek Elevator Products - Europe
20 Drake Mews, Crownhill
Milton Keynes, Bucks MK8 0ER UK
+44(0) 1908 261427, FAX +44(0) 1908 261674
Download PDF